1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
158 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
171 by the \SpecialChar LyX
176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
178 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
179 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
180 Documentation mailing list:
181 \begin_inset CommandInset href
183 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
199 \begin_inset Newline newline
203 \begin_inset Note Note
206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
207 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
208 \begin_inset Newline newline
213 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
223 LatexCommand tableofcontents
230 \begin_layout Chapter
234 \begin_layout Section
235 What is \SpecialChar LyX
239 \begin_layout Standard
241 is a document preparation system.
242 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
243 scripts, publishable books, business
244 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
245 It is unlike most other
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
255 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
271 pt type, left justified, 5
272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
281 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
285 \begin_layout Standard
286 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
291 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
295 \begin_layout Standard
300 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
301 's philosophy: most importantly,
302 the format of all of the manuals.
303 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
304 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
310 manual describes that, too.
313 \begin_layout Section
318 \begin_layout Standard
319 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
320 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
322 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
323 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
327 \begin_layout Standard
328 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
329 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
330 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
332 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
333 only a vertical scrollbar.
334 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
335 The first case is large images.
336 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
337 image and use the option
348 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
351 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
352 this doesn't work for equations yet.
355 \begin_layout Standard
356 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
357 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
365 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
372 \begin_layout Section
376 \begin_layout Standard
377 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
379 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
381 Just select the manual you want to read from the
388 \begin_layout Section
389 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
393 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
400 \begin_layout Standard
401 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
402 can be configured via the menu
404 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
408 \begin_inset Index idx
411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
418 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
420 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
421 packages are available.
422 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
424 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
426 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
431 \begin_inset space \space{}
434 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
435 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
437 To force \SpecialChar LyX
438 to re-inspect your system, you should use
440 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
444 \begin_inset Index idx
447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
448 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
454 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
455 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
458 \begin_layout Section
461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
463 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
472 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 installed, but you will not be
474 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
475 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
476 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
477 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
478 document can always be output as plain text
482 \begin_layout Standard
483 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
484 or DocBook classes or packages.
485 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
486 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
489 \begin_layout Standard
490 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
491 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
492 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
495 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
503 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
504 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
507 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
511 \begin_inset Index idx
514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
515 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
523 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
530 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
534 \begin_layout Chapter
535 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
539 \begin_layout Section
540 Basic File Operations
541 \begin_inset Index idx
544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
553 \begin_layout Standard
558 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
559 in addition to some more advanced operations:
562 \begin_layout Itemize
584 \begin_layout Itemize
600 arg "buffer-new-template"
606 \begin_layout Itemize
628 \begin_layout Itemize
636 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
640 \begin_layout Itemize
642 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
654 \begin_layout Itemize
666 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
670 \begin_layout Itemize
672 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
680 \begin_layout Itemize
702 \begin_layout Itemize
714 arg "buffer-write-as"
718 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
722 \begin_layout Itemize
724 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
740 \begin_layout Itemize
754 \begin_layout Itemize
768 \begin_layout Standard
769 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
770 a few minor differences.
773 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
784 command lists the available templates.
785 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
786 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
787 and possibly propose text fragments
789 for the document, features
790 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
793 you would otherwise need to
794 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
796 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
800 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
804 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
812 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
818 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
819 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
823 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
831 \begin_layout Standard
832 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
864 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
865 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
866 is just that — a big, blank space.
874 \begin_layout Standard
895 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
900 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
903 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
921 will reload the document from disk.
922 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
923 and want to restore it to the last save.
932 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
933 them as your changes.
936 \begin_layout Section
937 Basic Editing Features
938 \begin_inset Index idx
941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
950 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
957 \begin_layout Standard
958 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
959 can perform cut and paste operations
960 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
961 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
962 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
963 editing features and how to access
965 We will start with cut and paste.
968 \begin_layout Standard
969 As you might expect, the
973 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
974 various other editing features.
975 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
979 \begin_layout Itemize
985 \begin_inset Index idx
988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1017 \begin_layout Itemize
1023 \begin_inset Index idx
1026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1055 \begin_layout Itemize
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1089 \begin_layout Itemize
1093 \begin_inset space ~
1099 \begin_layout Itemize
1103 \begin_inset space ~
1109 \begin_layout Itemize
1113 \begin_inset space ~
1117 \begin_inset space ~
1123 \begin_inset Index idx
1126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1135 \begin_inset Index idx
1138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1153 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1163 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1169 \begin_layout Standard
1170 The first three are self-explanatory.
1171 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1172 and other programs by
1193 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1194 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1199 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1200 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1201 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1202 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1203 into individual cells.
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1212 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1213 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1217 \begin_layout Standard
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1226 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1228 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1230 \begin_inset space ~
1237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1243 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1244 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1245 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1251 \begin_inset space \space{}
1254 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1255 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1258 \begin_inset space ~
1261 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1263 \begin_inset space ~
1267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1280 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1281 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1283 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1287 \begin_inset space ~
1292 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1293 start a new paragraph.
1294 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1295 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1300 \begin_inset space ~
1303 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1309 \begin_inset space ~
1317 \begin_inset space ~
1320 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1323 paste from the primary selection.
1324 This is normally the currently selected text.
1327 \begin_layout Standard
1330 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1332 \begin_inset space ~
1336 \begin_inset space ~
1344 \begin_inset space ~
1348 \begin_inset space ~
1354 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1360 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1363 \begin_inset space ~
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1377 button to skip the current word.
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1386 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1390 \begin_inset space ~
1395 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1397 If the toggle is set, searching for
1398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 will not match the word
1410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1424 Match whole words only
1426 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1427 to only find complete words, e.
1428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1457 offers also an advanced
1460 \begin_inset space ~
1464 \begin_inset space ~
1469 feature that is described in section
1470 \begin_inset space ~
1474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1476 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1483 \begin_layout Standard
1484 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1485 \begin_inset space \space{}
1489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1497 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1499 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1504 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1511 \begin_layout Standard
1515 arg "inset-select-all"
1518 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1519 When the cursor is inside an inset
1522 arg "inset-select-all"
1525 selects the content of the inset.
1529 arg "inset-select-all"
1532 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1537 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1540 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1544 \begin_layout Section
1546 \begin_inset Index idx
1549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1556 \begin_inset Index idx
1559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1568 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1578 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1581 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1584 or the toolbar button
1590 to undo some mistake.
1591 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1596 or the toolbar button
1603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1610 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1614 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1617 \begin_layout Standard
1618 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1627 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1628 This is a consequence of the 100
1629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1632 step undo limit mentioned above.
1635 \begin_layout Standard
1644 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1646 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1650 \begin_layout Section
1652 \begin_inset Index idx
1655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1664 \begin_layout Standard
1665 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1668 \begin_layout Enumerate
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1678 once anywhere in the edit window.
1679 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1683 \begin_layout Enumerate
1688 \begin_layout Itemize
1695 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1698 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1701 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1702 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1705 \begin_layout Itemize
1706 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1709 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1716 \begin_layout Enumerate
1717 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1721 \begin_layout Standard
1722 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1723 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1727 \begin_layout Section
1729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1731 name "sec:Navigating"
1736 \begin_inset Index idx
1739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 \begin_layout Standard
1750 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1753 \begin_layout Itemize
1758 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1759 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1762 \begin_layout Itemize
1763 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1765 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1767 \begin_inset space ~
1772 or by the toolbar button
1775 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1781 \begin_layout Itemize
1782 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1784 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1787 and use the same menu to return to them.
1788 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1791 \begin_layout Standard
1795 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1800 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1801 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1803 \begin_inset space ~
1808 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1809 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1810 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1811 your last editing position.
1814 \begin_layout Standard
1819 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1823 \begin_layout Subsection
1825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1827 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1832 \begin_inset Index idx
1835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1836 Navigating ! Outline
1842 \begin_inset Index idx
1845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1854 \begin_layout Standard
1855 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1856 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1857 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1865 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1869 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1870 \begin_inset space ~
1874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1876 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1881 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1885 \begin_layout Standard
1886 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1887 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1888 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1889 dialog and to modify the citation.
1892 \begin_layout Standard
1897 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1898 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1900 Labels and References
1902 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1911 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1914 \begin_layout Standard
1915 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1916 you further to control the display.
1921 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1922 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1928 option keeps it in the current view state.
1929 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1933 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1937 3, the subsections of sections
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1941 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1946 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1947 \begin_inset space ~
1951 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1961 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1964 \begin_layout Standard
1971 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1972 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1986 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1987 So, for example, you can move section
1988 \begin_inset space ~
1992 \begin_inset space ~
1995 2.4 or after section
1996 \begin_inset space ~
2001 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2014 (or the corresponding key bindings
2022 ) you can change the level of sections.
2023 So you can for example make section
2024 \begin_inset space ~
2028 \begin_inset space ~
2032 \begin_inset space ~
2038 \begin_layout Standard
2039 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2040 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2043 \begin_layout Subsection
2044 Horizontal Scrolling
2045 \begin_inset Index idx
2048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2049 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2057 \begin_layout Standard
2059 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2065 \begin_inset space \space{}
2069 \begin_inset space ~
2072 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2073 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2074 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2078 \begin_layout Standard
2079 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2083 \begin_layout Itemize
2085 is used on a small tablet computer
2088 \begin_layout Itemize
2089 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2101 \begin_inset space ~
2114 \begin_layout Itemize
2115 Math constructs with long command names
2118 \begin_layout Standard
2119 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2120 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2122 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2123 windows so that table
2124 \begin_inset space ~
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2130 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2135 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2137 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2138 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2141 \begin_layout Standard
2142 \begin_inset Float table
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2150 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2155 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2159 Horizontal scrolling test.
2167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2169 \begin_inset Tabular
2170 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2171 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2173 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2174 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2216 \begin_layout Section
2217 Input/Word Completion
2218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2220 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2225 \begin_inset Index idx
2228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2235 \begin_inset Index idx
2238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2269 \begin_layout Standard
2271 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2273 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2274 is used to propose completions.
2277 \begin_layout Standard
2278 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2281 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2286 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2293 \begin_inset space ~
2297 \begin_inset space ~
2302 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2306 \begin_inset space ~
2311 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2312 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2316 \begin_inset space ~
2322 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2323 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2324 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2325 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2328 \begin_layout Standard
2330 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2331 completions available.
2336 key to accept a proposed completion.
2337 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2338 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2339 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2346 \begin_layout Standard
2347 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2348 ing options for text.
2350 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2352 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2354 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2357 he special math option
2361 enables characters to be composed.
2362 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2363 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2366 , you can then input the characters
2367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2378 to a formula to get it.
2379 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2380 of the math toolbar.
2381 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2385 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2386 's installation folder.
2388 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2389 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2396 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2401 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2402 In the example above,
2407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2439 \begin_layout Section
2441 \begin_inset Index idx
2444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2451 \begin_inset Index idx
2454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2483 \begin_inset Index idx
2486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2517 \begin_layout Standard
2518 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2532 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2535 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2539 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2540 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2546 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2553 \begin_layout Standard
2557 \begin_inset space ~
2565 \begin_inset space ~
2586 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2590 \begin_layout Labeling
2591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2595 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2596 LatexCommand nomenclature
2598 description "Tabulator key"
2605 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2607 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2608 \begin_inset space ~
2612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2614 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2621 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2625 , especially section
2626 \begin_inset space ~
2630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2632 reference "subsec:Lists"
2638 If you are still confused, look in the
2643 \begin_inset Newline newline
2651 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2652 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2656 \begin_layout Labeling
2657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2661 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2662 LatexCommand nomenclature
2664 description "Escape key"
2672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2679 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2680 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2683 \begin_layout Labeling
2684 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2690 \begin_inset space ~
2694 \begin_inset space ~
2701 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2702 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 There are three modifier keys:
2710 \begin_layout Labeling
2711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2729 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2730 LatexCommand nomenclature
2732 description "Control key"
2737 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2738 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2742 \begin_layout Itemize
2751 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2754 \begin_layout Itemize
2763 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2766 \begin_layout Itemize
2775 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2779 \begin_layout Labeling
2780 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2798 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2799 LatexCommand nomenclature
2801 description "Shift key"
2806 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2807 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2810 \begin_layout Labeling
2811 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2829 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2830 LatexCommand nomenclature
2832 description "Alt or Meta key"
2837 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2838 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2839 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2845 \begin_inset Newline newline
2848 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2850 menu accelerator keys
2853 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2854 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2858 \begin_layout Standard
2859 For example, the sequence
2860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2866 \begin_inset space ~
2870 \begin_inset space ~
2876 \begin_inset space ~
2884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2903 \begin_inset space ~
2909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2919 \begin_layout Standard
2924 manual lists all other things bound to the
2932 \begin_layout Standard
2933 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2935 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2936 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2937 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2938 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2939 The \SpecialChar LyX
2940 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2941 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2942 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2944 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2960 followed by a capital
2967 \begin_layout Chapter
2970 \begin_inset Index idx
2973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2983 \begin_layout Section
2985 \begin_inset Index idx
2988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2997 \begin_layout Subsection
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3003 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3004 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3005 numbering schemes, and so on.
3006 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3007 and format the title of your document differently.
3010 \begin_layout Standard
3015 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3016 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3017 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3018 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3019 picks one for you by default.
3020 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3023 \begin_layout Subsection
3025 \begin_inset Index idx
3028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3037 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3044 \begin_layout Standard
3045 You can select a class using the
3047 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3048 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3052 \begin_inset Index idx
3055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3062 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3066 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3070 \begin_layout Standard
3071 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3076 \begin_layout Description
3077 Article for basic articles
3080 \begin_layout Description
3081 Report for basic reports
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Book for writing a book
3088 \begin_layout Description
3089 Letter for US-style letters
3092 \begin_layout Standard
3093 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3094 only uses if you have installed
3095 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3096 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3097 distributions will include
3099 Here are some of the classes.
3100 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3102 Special Document Classes
3111 \begin_layout Description
3112 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3115 \begin_layout Description
3116 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3120 \begin_layout Description
3121 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3125 \begin_layout Description
3126 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3127 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3128 There are three article layouts available.
3129 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3130 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3131 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3132 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3137 sequential numbering
3138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3141 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3142 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3143 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3144 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3147 \begin_layout Description
3148 Beamer Layout for presentations
3151 \begin_layout Description
3152 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3153 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3154 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3155 with \SpecialChar LyX
3159 \begin_layout Description
3160 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3163 \begin_layout Description
3165 \begin_inset space ~
3168 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3171 \begin_layout Description
3172 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3175 \begin_layout Description
3176 Foils Used to make transparencies
3179 \begin_layout Description
3180 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3181 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3182 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3183 with \SpecialChar LyX
3187 \begin_layout Description
3188 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3189 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3192 \begin_layout Description
3193 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3196 \begin_layout Description
3197 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3200 \begin_layout Description
3201 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3202 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3203 (Is used by this document.)
3206 \begin_layout Description
3207 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3210 \begin_layout Description
3211 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3214 \begin_layout Description
3219 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3220 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3222 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3226 \begin_layout Description
3227 Slides Used to make transparencies
3230 \begin_layout Description
3232 \begin_inset space ~
3235 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3236 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3239 \begin_layout Description
3240 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3243 \begin_layout Standard
3244 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3246 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3248 Special Document Classes
3255 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3256 of the document classes.
3259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3263 \begin_layout Standard
3264 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3266 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3267 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3269 \begin_inset Index idx
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3289 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3290 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3292 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3295 \begin_layout Standard
3298 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3303 , are highly specialized.
3305 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3306 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3307 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3308 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3309 by some document class.
3310 There are just too many of them.
3311 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3323 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3324 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3325 document class for a new file.
3327 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3330 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3337 manual for information on how to install them.
3338 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3344 \begin_layout Standard
3345 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3346 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3347 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3348 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3349 class files to be used for dissertation
3350 s submitted to those universities.
3351 The \SpecialChar LyX
3352 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3354 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3358 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3364 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3371 name "subsec:Modules"
3376 \begin_inset Index idx
3379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3388 \begin_layout Standard
3389 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3390 chosen document class.
3391 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3392 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3399 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3403 \begin_inset Index idx
3406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3413 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3417 \begin_layout Standard
3418 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3419 packages or file format converters that are not always
3420 installed by default.
3422 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3423 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3424 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3425 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3427 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3428 file without the missing prerequisites.
3429 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3430 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3433 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3437 \begin_inset Index idx
3440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3447 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3452 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3455 \begin_layout Standard
3456 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3464 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3466 will advise you about these things.
3474 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3478 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3483 \begin_inset Index idx
3486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3487 Document ! Local Layout
3495 \begin_layout Standard
3496 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3497 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3498 : They are intended to be used in
3499 a variety of different documents.
3500 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3501 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3502 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3503 need a specific inset or
3504 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3506 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3509 style only that one time.
3510 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3512 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3530 manual for information on how to use it.
3533 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3537 \begin_layout Standard
3538 Each class has a default set of options.
3539 Here's a quick table describing them:
3542 \begin_layout Standard
3543 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3549 \begin_layout Standard
3551 \begin_inset Tabular
3552 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3553 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3554 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3555 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3556 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4012 \begin_layout Standard
4013 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4019 \begin_layout Standard
4020 You're probably also wondering what
4021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4025 \begin_inset space ~
4029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4033 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4034 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4039 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4044 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4054 headings, there are also
4062 headings, and so on.
4063 We will describe these headings fully in section
4064 \begin_inset space ~
4068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4070 reference "subsec:Headings"
4077 \begin_layout Subsection
4079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4081 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4086 \begin_inset Index idx
4089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4096 \begin_inset Index idx
4099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4108 \begin_layout Standard
4109 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4118 \begin_inset space ~
4126 \begin_inset space ~
4131 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4133 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4134 doesn't support special options you want to
4135 use for your document.
4136 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4137 -class and its options, you have to read
4141 \begin_layout Standard
4145 \begin_inset space ~
4152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4158 \begin_inset space ~
4163 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4164 You can choose between the following five options:
4167 \begin_layout Labeling
4168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4173 Use default page style of current class.
4176 \begin_layout Labeling
4177 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4182 No page numbers or headings.
4185 \begin_layout Labeling
4186 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4194 \begin_layout Labeling
4195 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4200 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4201 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4202 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4203 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4206 \begin_layout Labeling
4207 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4212 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4213 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4219 \begin_inset Index idx
4222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4230 How they are defined is explained in section
4231 \begin_inset space ~
4235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4237 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4244 \begin_layout Standard
4245 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4246 \begin_inset space ~
4250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4252 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4259 \begin_layout Subsection
4260 Paper Size and Orientation
4261 \begin_inset Index idx
4264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4265 Document ! Paper size
4271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4273 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 You can find the following options in the menu
4284 \begin_inset space ~
4291 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4295 \begin_inset Index idx
4298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4307 \begin_layout Labeling
4308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4312 \begin_inset space ~
4317 What size paper to print on.
4322 \begin_layout Itemize
4328 \begin_layout Itemize
4334 \begin_layout Itemize
4340 \begin_layout Itemize
4346 \begin_layout Itemize
4349 US letter, US legal, US executive
4352 \begin_layout Itemize
4358 \begin_layout Itemize
4365 \begin_layout Labeling
4366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4371 To choose whether to output as
4382 \begin_layout Labeling
4383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4387 \begin_inset space ~
4392 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4393 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4396 \begin_layout Subsection
4398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4400 name "subsec:Margins"
4405 \begin_inset Index idx
4408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4415 \begin_inset Index idx
4418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4427 \begin_layout Standard
4428 Paper margins are set in the menu
4430 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4434 \begin_inset Index idx
4437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4446 \begin_layout Standard
4447 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4448 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4449 the paper format and the font size into account.
4452 \begin_layout Subsection
4456 \begin_layout Standard
4457 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4463 That includes the paragraph environments.
4464 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4465 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4466 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4468 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4479 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4480 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4481 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4484 \begin_layout Section
4485 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4486 \begin_inset Index idx
4489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4490 Paragraph ! Indentation
4498 \begin_layout Subsection
4500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4502 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4509 \begin_layout Standard
4510 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4511 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4514 \begin_layout Standard
4515 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4516 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4517 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4518 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4522 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4528 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4529 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4530 language than English.
4532 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4535 \begin_layout Standard
4536 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4537 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4538 into \SpecialChar LyX
4540 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4543 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4545 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4546 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4547 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4554 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4555 goes to produce a printable file.
4560 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4562 gives you the ability globally to change
4566 these pre-coded spacings.
4567 We will explain more later.
4570 \begin_layout Subsection
4571 Paragraph Separation
4572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4574 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4579 \begin_inset Index idx
4582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4583 Paragraph ! Separation
4591 \begin_layout Standard
4599 \begin_inset space ~
4607 \begin_inset space ~
4614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4618 \begin_inset Index idx
4621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4630 \begin_layout Subsection
4634 \begin_layout Standard
4635 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4638 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4640 \begin_inset space ~
4645 dialog and toggle the
4648 \begin_inset space ~
4653 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4656 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4660 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4661 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4665 \begin_layout Standard
4666 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4667 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4670 \begin_layout Subsection
4672 \begin_inset Index idx
4675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4676 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4684 \begin_layout Standard
4687 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4691 \begin_inset Index idx
4694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4703 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4707 \begin_inset space ~
4716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4717 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4723 \begin_inset Index idx
4726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4733 installed to use this feature.
4738 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4740 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4742 \begin_inset space ~
4747 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4748 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4751 \begin_layout Section
4752 Paragraph Environments
4753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4755 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4760 \begin_inset Index idx
4763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4764 Paragraph ! Environments
4770 \begin_inset Index idx
4773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4774 Paragraph environments|(
4782 \begin_layout Subsection
4786 \begin_layout Standard
4787 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4790 \begin_layout Standard
4799 } \SpecialChar ldots
4809 \begin_inset Newline newline
4812 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4814 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4815 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4816 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4825 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 A paragraph environment is simply a
4830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4837 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4838 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4839 scheme, labels, and so on.
4840 Additionally, you can
4841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4848 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4849 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4850 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4851 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4853 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4855 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4858 \begin_layout Standard
4859 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4860 \begin_inset Graphics
4861 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4867 at the left end of the toolbar.
4869 will change the environment of the
4873 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4874 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4875 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4879 \begin_layout Standard
4888 create a new paragraph using the
4892 paragraph environment.
4894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4901 because if you are in one of these environments:
4904 \begin_layout Itemize
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4916 \begin_layout Itemize
4922 \begin_layout Itemize
4928 \begin_layout Itemize
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4940 \begin_layout Itemize
4946 \begin_layout Standard
4948 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4952 , rather than resetting it to
4957 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4958 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4964 reference "sec:Nesting"
4971 \begin_layout Subsection
4975 \begin_layout Standard
4976 The default paragraph environment is
4981 It creates a plain paragraph.
4983 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4984 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4985 this manual) are in the
4992 \begin_layout Standard
4993 You can nest a paragraph using the
4997 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5005 \begin_layout Subsection
5007 \begin_inset Index idx
5010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5019 \begin_layout Standard
5020 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5021 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5030 for thanks or contact information.
5031 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5032 places all of this on a separate page
5033 along with today's date.
5034 For other types of documents, the title
5035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5042 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5046 \begin_layout Standard
5048 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5062 Here's how you use them:
5065 \begin_layout Itemize
5066 Put the title of your document in the
5073 \begin_layout Itemize
5074 Put the author name in the
5081 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5083 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5089 Note that using this environment is optional.
5090 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5091 will automatically insert today's date.
5092 If you don't want a date, use the option
5094 Suppress default date on front page
5098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5099 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5101 \begin_inset space ~
5109 \begin_layout Standard
5110 You can use footnotes to insert
5111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5118 or contact information.
5121 \begin_layout Subsection
5123 \begin_inset Index idx
5126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5135 name "subsec:Headings"
5142 \begin_layout Standard
5143 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5145 takes care of the numbering for you.
5148 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5150 \begin_inset Index idx
5153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5154 Section headings ! Numbered
5162 \begin_layout Standard
5163 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5167 \begin_layout Enumerate
5173 \begin_layout Enumerate
5179 \begin_layout Enumerate
5185 \begin_layout Enumerate
5191 \begin_layout Enumerate
5197 \begin_layout Enumerate
5203 \begin_layout Enumerate
5209 \begin_layout Standard
5211 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5212 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5213 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5216 \begin_layout Standard
5217 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5218 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5219 You group the book into chapters.
5221 does a similar grouping:
5224 \begin_layout Itemize
5229 is divided into either
5240 \begin_layout Itemize
5252 \begin_layout Itemize
5264 \begin_layout Itemize
5276 \begin_layout Itemize
5288 \begin_layout Itemize
5300 \begin_layout Standard
5301 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5309 Not all document types use the
5313 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5318 is the top-level heading.
5326 \begin_layout Standard
5331 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5332 labels it with its number,
5333 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5335 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5347 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5349 \begin_inset Index idx
5352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5353 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5361 \begin_layout Standard
5362 The unnumbered section headings have a
5363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5370 at the end of their name.
5371 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5372 the table of contents, see section
5373 \begin_inset space ~
5377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5387 Changing the Numbering
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5390 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5398 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5399 in the Table of Contents.
5400 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5402 Just as certain classes start with
5416 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5426 This is something you can change.
5429 \begin_layout Standard
5432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5436 \begin_inset Index idx
5439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5448 \begin_inset space ~
5452 \begin_inset space ~
5457 you will see two counters.
5462 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5463 numbers a section heading.
5464 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5468 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5469 Short Titles of Headings
5470 \begin_inset Index idx
5473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5474 Section headings ! Short titles
5480 \begin_inset Argument 1
5483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5492 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5499 \begin_layout Standard
5500 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5501 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5502 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5503 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5506 \begin_layout Standard
5508 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5509 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5510 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5511 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5514 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5516 \begin_inset space ~
5522 This will insert a box labeled
5523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5527 \begin_inset space ~
5531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5534 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5535 This also works for captions inside floats.
5536 There can only be one short title per title.
5539 \begin_layout Standard
5540 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5547 \begin_layout Standard
5548 The following information applies to all section headings:
5551 \begin_layout Itemize
5552 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5555 \begin_layout Itemize
5556 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5559 \begin_layout Itemize
5560 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5563 \begin_layout Itemize
5564 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5567 \begin_layout Subsection
5571 \begin_layout Standard
5573 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5587 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5588 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5589 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5590 the text they contain.
5591 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5599 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5602 \begin_layout Standard
5603 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5612 when you start a new paragraph.
5613 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5617 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5618 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5619 have to change back to the
5623 environment yourself.
5626 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5635 \begin_inset Index idx
5638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5647 \begin_layout Standard
5648 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5649 time for the differences.
5658 are identical except for one difference:
5662 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5671 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5674 \begin_layout Standard
5675 Here's an example of the
5688 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5690 See – no indentation!
5694 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5695 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5696 the other paragraph.
5699 \begin_layout Standard
5700 Here's another example, this time in the
5707 \begin_layout Quotation
5713 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5714 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5715 the first line, then
5719 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5723 you were quoting other text.
5726 \begin_layout Quotation
5727 Here's a new paragraph.
5728 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5729 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5732 \begin_layout Standard
5733 As the examples show,
5737 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5738 They should put quotes in the
5743 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5747 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5750 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5752 \begin_inset Index idx
5755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5762 \begin_inset Index idx
5765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5781 \begin_layout Standard
5786 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5792 \begin_inset Newline newline
5795 Which I did not rehearse!
5799 It could be much worse.
5800 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5802 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5803 indented a bit more than the first.
5804 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5810 \begin_inset Newline newline
5813 And make things look fine
5814 \begin_inset Newline newline
5820 arg "newline-insert newline"
5826 \begin_layout Standard
5831 does not indent both margins.
5832 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5833 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5836 arg "newline-insert newline"
5842 \begin_layout Subsection
5844 \begin_inset Index idx
5847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5863 \begin_layout Standard
5865 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5875 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5876 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5885 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5886 lets you provide your own label.
5887 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5888 describing some general features of all four of them.
5891 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5898 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5899 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5908 reset the environment to
5912 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5913 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5914 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5918 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5922 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5929 \begin_layout Standard
5930 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5931 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5932 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5934 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5935 you read all of section
5936 \begin_inset space ~
5940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5942 reference "sec:Nesting"
5949 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5951 \begin_inset Index idx
5954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5970 \begin_layout Standard
5971 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5975 paragraph environment.
5976 It has the following properties:
5979 \begin_layout Itemize
5980 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5984 \begin_layout Itemize
5986 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5989 \begin_layout Itemize
5990 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5994 \begin_layout Itemize
5995 The items can have any length.
5997 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5998 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6005 \begin_layout Itemize
6010 environment inside another
6014 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6018 \begin_layout Itemize
6019 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6022 \begin_layout Itemize
6024 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6027 \begin_layout Itemize
6029 \begin_inset space ~
6033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6035 reference "sec:Nesting"
6039 for a full explanation of nesting.
6043 \begin_layout Standard
6044 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6053 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6056 \begin_layout Standard
6057 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6058 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6061 \begin_layout Itemize
6062 The label for the first level
6066 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6070 \begin_layout Itemize
6071 The label for the second level is a dash.
6075 \begin_layout Itemize
6076 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6080 \begin_layout Itemize
6081 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6085 \begin_layout Itemize
6086 Back out to the third level.
6090 \begin_layout Itemize
6091 Back to the second level.
6095 \begin_layout Itemize
6096 Back to the outermost level.
6099 \begin_layout Standard
6100 These are the default labels for an
6105 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6110 dialog in the submenu
6115 \begin_inset Index idx
6118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6124 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6128 \begin_layout Standard
6129 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6130 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6132 \begin_inset space ~
6136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6138 reference "sec:Nesting"
6145 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6147 \begin_inset Index idx
6150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6159 name "sec:Enumerate"
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6171 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6172 It has these properties:
6175 \begin_layout Enumerate
6176 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6180 \begin_layout Enumerate
6181 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6185 \begin_layout Enumerate
6187 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6190 \begin_layout Enumerate
6195 environment resets the counter to one.
6198 \begin_layout Enumerate
6211 \begin_layout Enumerate
6212 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6213 Items can have any length.
6216 \begin_layout Enumerate
6217 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6220 \begin_layout Enumerate
6221 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6224 \begin_layout Enumerate
6225 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6229 \begin_layout Standard
6238 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6240 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6241 labels the four different levels in an
6248 \begin_layout Enumerate
6249 The first level of an
6253 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6257 \begin_layout Enumerate
6258 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6262 \begin_layout Enumerate
6263 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6267 \begin_layout Enumerate
6268 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6271 \begin_layout Enumerate
6272 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6277 \begin_layout Enumerate
6278 Back to the third level
6282 \begin_layout Enumerate
6283 Back to the second level.
6287 \begin_layout Enumerate
6288 Back to the outermost level.
6291 \begin_layout Standard
6292 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6296 environment, see section
6297 \begin_inset space ~
6301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6303 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6308 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6312 \begin_layout Standard
6313 There is more to nesting
6317 environments than we've stated here.
6318 You should read section
6319 \begin_inset space ~
6323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6325 reference "sec:Nesting"
6329 to learn more about nesting.
6332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6334 \begin_inset Index idx
6337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6346 \begin_layout Standard
6347 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6351 list has no fixed label.
6352 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6361 of the first line as the label.
6365 \begin_layout Description
6366 Example: This is an example of the
6373 \begin_layout Standard
6375 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6379 \begin_layout Standard
6381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6388 it is meant that the first usage of the
6392 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6394 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6402 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6407 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6408 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6410 \begin_inset space ~
6416 \begin_inset space ~
6420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6422 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6426 for more information.) Here is an example:
6429 \begin_layout Description
6431 \begin_inset space ~
6434 Example: This one shows how to use a
6437 \begin_inset space ~
6449 \begin_layout Description
6450 Usage: You should use the
6454 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6455 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6457 It's not a good idea to use a
6461 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6462 You're better off using
6474 paragraphs into them.
6477 \begin_layout Description
6478 Nesting: You can nest
6482 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6486 \begin_layout Standard
6487 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6488 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6489 them from the first line.
6492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6494 \begin_inset Index idx
6497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6506 \begin_layout Standard
6511 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6512 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6516 \begin_layout Standard
6525 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6527 Here are its properties:
6530 \begin_layout Labeling
6531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6533 \begin_inset space ~
6536 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6545 of each line as the item label.
6550 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6551 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6552 space as described above.
6555 \begin_layout Labeling
6556 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6557 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6558 uses different margins for the item label and the
6559 body of the item text.
6560 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6561 label width plus a little extra space.
6565 \begin_layout Labeling
6566 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6568 \begin_inset space ~
6571 width \SpecialChar LyX
6572 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6573 If the label width is larger, the label
6574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6581 into the first line.
6582 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6583 margin of the rest of the item text.
6586 \begin_layout Labeling
6587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6589 \begin_inset space ~
6592 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6597 environment has the same left margin.
6598 \begin_inset Newline newline
6601 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6604 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6606 \begin_inset space ~
6611 dialog (toolbar button
6614 arg "layout-paragraph"
6621 \begin_inset space ~
6626 determines the default label width.
6627 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6636 multiple times instead.
6637 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6647 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6650 \begin_inset space ~
6655 every time you alter a label in a
6660 \begin_inset Newline newline
6663 The predefined default width is the length of
6664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6672 \begin_inset space ~
6678 \begin_layout Standard
6683 list the same way as the
6687 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6693 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6702 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6703 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6705 \begin_inset space ~
6709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6711 reference "sec:Nesting"
6715 to learn about nesting.
6718 \begin_layout Standard
6719 There is yet another feature of the
6723 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6724 left-justifies the item labels by
6726 You can use additional
6730 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6731 justifies the item label.
6736 are documented in section
6737 \begin_inset space ~
6741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6743 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6748 Here are some examples:
6751 \begin_layout Labeling
6752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6753 Left The default for
6760 \begin_layout Labeling
6761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6762 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6769 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6772 \begin_layout Labeling
6773 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6774 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6778 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6785 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6788 \begin_layout Subsection
6790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6792 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6797 \begin_inset Index idx
6800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6810 The features described in this section require that the module
6812 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6814 is loaded in the document settings.
6815 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6821 \begin_inset Index idx
6824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6835 Custom Enumerate Lists
6836 \begin_inset Index idx
6839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6840 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6848 \begin_layout Standard
6850 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6856 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6857 There you add the command
6860 \begin_layout Standard
6868 \begin_layout Standard
6880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6881 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6882 Code, look at section
6883 \begin_inset space ~
6887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6889 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6902 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6909 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6910 For capital Roman numerals replace
6922 in the command above.
6923 For Arabic numerals use
6931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6938 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6953 \begin_layout Standard
6955 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6963 You can only number 26
6964 \begin_inset space ~
6967 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6975 \begin_layout Standard
6976 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6977 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6980 \begin_layout Standard
6981 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6984 \begin_layout Enumerate
6985 \begin_inset Argument 1
6988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7014 \begin_layout Enumerate
7015 \begin_inset Argument 1
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7041 \begin_layout Enumerate
7046 \begin_layout Enumerate
7047 \begin_inset Argument 1
7050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7074 \begin_layout Enumerate
7075 \begin_inset Argument 1
7078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7104 \begin_layout Standard
7105 For this list these commands were used:
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7119 \begin_inset Newline newline
7127 \begin_inset Newline newline
7135 \begin_inset Newline newline
7145 \begin_layout Standard
7152 makes the label emphasized and
7161 \begin_layout Standard
7162 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7170 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7171 lists until you change the definition.
7179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7181 \begin_inset Index idx
7184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7185 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7193 \begin_layout Standard
7194 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7197 \begin_layout Enumerate
7198 \begin_inset Argument 1
7201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7220 \begin_inset Note Note
7223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7224 goes back to default numbering
7232 \begin_layout Enumerate
7236 \begin_layout Standard
7240 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7244 \begin_layout Standard
7245 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7250 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7251 to indicate that it is a resumed
7252 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7253 , but in the output.
7256 \begin_layout Standard
7257 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7265 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7274 \begin_layout Standard
7275 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7277 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7278 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7279 of a normal enumeration.
7280 There, insert the command
7283 \begin_layout Standard
7289 \begin_layout Standard
7294 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7298 \begin_layout Enumerate
7302 \begin_layout Enumerate
7306 \begin_layout Standard
7307 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7310 \begin_layout Enumerate
7311 \begin_inset Argument 1
7314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7330 This enumeration starts at 4
7333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7335 \begin_inset Index idx
7338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7348 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7350 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7353 \begin_layout Itemize
7357 \begin_layout Itemize
7358 with standard spacing
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7362 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7364 Add there the command
7368 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7371 \begin_layout Itemize
7372 \begin_inset Argument 1
7375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 \begin_layout Itemize
7398 \begin_layout Itemize
7402 \begin_layout Standard
7403 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7410 \begin_inset Index idx
7413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7421 For more information see its documentation,
7422 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7432 \begin_layout Standard
7433 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7435 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7436 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7440 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7443 \begin_layout Enumerate
7444 \begin_inset Argument 1
7447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7455 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7468 \begin_layout Enumerate
7469 with negative indentation
7472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7473 Further Customization
7474 \begin_inset Index idx
7477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7478 Lists ! Customization
7486 \begin_layout Standard
7487 You can also change the style of description lists.
7491 \begin_layout Standard
7497 \begin_layout Standard
7498 changes the description label font, the command
7501 \begin_layout Standard
7507 \begin_layout Standard
7508 sets the list style.
7511 \begin_layout Standard
7512 An example where the command
7515 \begin_layout Standard
7520 itshape, style=nextline
7523 \begin_layout Standard
7527 \begin_layout Description
7529 \begin_inset space ~
7533 \begin_inset Argument 1
7536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7542 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7544 itshape, style=nextline
7554 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7555 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7559 \begin_layout Description
7561 \begin_inset space ~
7564 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7565 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7566 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7569 \begin_layout Standard
7570 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7576 \begin_inset Index idx
7579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7587 For more information see its documentation
7588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7598 \begin_layout Subsection
7600 \begin_inset Index idx
7603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7612 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7614 \begin_inset space ~
7617 Address: An Overview
7620 \begin_layout Standard
7621 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7622 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7630 \begin_inset space ~
7636 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7637 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7638 gags on the document.
7639 In contrast, you can use the
7646 \begin_inset space ~
7651 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7652 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7656 \begin_layout Standard
7657 Of course, you're not limited to using
7664 \begin_inset space ~
7673 \begin_inset space ~
7678 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7679 some European academic papers.
7682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7686 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7693 \begin_layout Standard
7698 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7699 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7703 \begin_inset space ~
7708 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7709 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7710 Here's an example of each:
7713 \begin_layout Right Address
7715 \begin_inset Newline newline
7719 \begin_inset Newline newline
7723 \begin_inset Newline newline
7726 When is it? What is today?
7729 \begin_layout Standard
7733 \begin_inset space ~
7739 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7741 the largest block of text on a single line.
7742 Here's an example of the
7749 \begin_layout Address
7751 \begin_inset Newline newline
7754 Where do I send this
7755 \begin_inset Newline newline
7758 Your post office and country
7761 \begin_layout Standard
7762 As you can see, both
7769 \begin_inset space ~
7774 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7779 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7780 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7786 This makes sense, since
7794 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7795 Thus, you have to use
7802 arg "newline-insert newline"
7807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7808 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7810 \begin_inset space ~
7814 \begin_inset space ~
7819 ) to start a new line in an
7826 \begin_inset space ~
7834 \begin_layout Subsection
7838 \begin_layout Standard
7839 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7840 or list of references.
7842 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7845 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7847 \begin_inset Index idx
7850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7859 \begin_layout Standard
7864 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7865 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7866 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7867 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7881 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7882 The book document classes ignores the
7886 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7890 in a letter document class.
7893 \begin_layout Standard
7898 environment does several things for you.
7899 First, it puts the centered label
7900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7908 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7910 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7911 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7912 the subsequent text.
7913 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7915 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7919 \begin_layout Standard
7920 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7924 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7925 The new paragraph will still be in the
7930 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7931 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7934 \begin_layout Standard
7935 \begin_inset Float figure
7942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7944 \begin_inset Graphics
7945 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7953 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7958 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7980 We would love to demonstrate the
7984 environment, but since this document is in the
7985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7992 class, we can't do this.
7993 We inserted it therefore as figure
7994 \begin_inset space ~
7998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8000 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8005 If you have never heard of an
8006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8013 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8016 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8018 \begin_inset Index idx
8021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8030 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8037 \begin_layout Standard
8042 environment is used to list references.
8043 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8044 only use it at the end of the document.
8056 \begin_layout Standard
8057 When you first open a
8061 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8062 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8078 depending on the document class.
8079 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8080 Each paragraph of the
8084 environment is a bibliography entry.
8089 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8090 Each new paragraph is still in the
8097 \begin_layout Standard
8098 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8099 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8101 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8103 handling, have a look at section
8104 \begin_inset space ~
8108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8110 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8117 \begin_layout Subsection
8118 Special Environments
8121 \begin_layout Standard
8123 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8124 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8127 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8132 \begin_inset Index idx
8135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8145 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8152 \begin_layout Standard
8158 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8160 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8165 key as a fixed whitespace.
8169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8182 \begin_inset space ~
8187 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8205 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8208 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8211 arg "newline-insert newline"
8228 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8229 So, when you finish using the
8234 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8235 Also, you can nest the
8240 environment inside of others.
8243 \begin_layout Standard
8244 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8247 \begin_layout Itemize
8251 arg "newline-insert newline"
8254 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8259 \begin_inset space \space{}
8269 arg "newline-insert newline"
8275 \begin_layout Itemize
8279 arg "newline-insert newline"
8289 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8295 \begin_layout Itemize
8296 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8297 You must put at least one
8301 in any line you want blank.
8302 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8306 \begin_layout Itemize
8307 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8311 since that will insert
8316 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8319 arg "self-insert \""
8325 \begin_layout Standard
8329 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8333 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8337 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8341 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8345 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8346 printf("Hello World!
8351 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8355 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8359 \begin_layout Standard
8360 This is just the standard
8361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8372 \begin_layout Standard
8378 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8380 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8381 as if you used a typewriter.
8382 \begin_inset Index idx
8385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8386 Paragraph environments|)
8391 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8394 Program Code Listings
8399 \begin_inset space ~
8407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8411 \begin_inset Index idx
8414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8423 \begin_layout Standard
8428 environment is similar to the
8433 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8434 computer console text.
8439 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8453 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8454 you can have empty lines.
8467 \begin_layout Itemize
8468 have a certain language and a text style
8471 \begin_layout Itemize
8472 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8473 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8474 and \SpecialChar TeX
8478 \begin_layout Standard
8479 Because of these properties
8483 works like a typewriter.
8487 \begin_layout Verbatim
8492 \begin_layout Verbatim
8496 The following 2 lines are empty:
8499 \begin_layout Verbatim
8503 \begin_layout Verbatim
8507 \begin_layout Verbatim
8509 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8514 \begin_layout Standard
8519 environment is identical to
8523 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8524 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8531 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8536 \begin_layout Section
8537 Nesting Environments
8538 \begin_inset Index idx
8541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8542 Nesting ! Environments
8548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8557 \begin_layout Subsection
8561 \begin_layout Standard
8563 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8565 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8567 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8569 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8581 \begin_layout Enumerate
8585 \begin_layout Enumerate
8590 \begin_layout Enumerate
8594 \begin_layout Enumerate
8599 \begin_layout Enumerate
8603 \begin_layout Standard
8604 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8605 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8609 \begin_inset space ~
8613 \begin_inset space ~
8621 \begin_inset space ~
8625 \begin_inset space ~
8630 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8632 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8635 arg "depth-increment"
8641 arg "depth-decrement"
8655 arg "depth-increment"
8661 arg "depth-decrement"
8665 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8666 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8670 \begin_layout Standard
8671 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8672 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8673 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8674 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8675 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8678 \begin_layout Standard
8679 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8681 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8683 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8686 \begin_layout Subsection
8687 What You Can and Can't Nest
8690 \begin_layout Standard
8691 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8692 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8695 \begin_layout Standard
8696 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8697 than a simple yes or no.
8698 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 Completely unnestable
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8715 \begin_layout Standard
8716 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8717 environments have them:
8720 \begin_layout Description
8721 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8722 Can't nest into them.
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8744 \begin_layout Itemize
8750 \begin_layout Itemize
8757 \begin_layout Description
8759 \begin_inset space ~
8762 Nestable You can nest them.
8763 You can nest other things into them.
8767 \begin_layout Itemize
8773 \begin_layout Itemize
8779 \begin_layout Itemize
8785 \begin_layout Itemize
8791 \begin_layout Itemize
8797 \begin_layout Itemize
8803 \begin_layout Itemize
8809 \begin_layout Itemize
8816 \begin_layout Itemize
8822 \begin_layout Itemize
8829 \begin_layout Description
8830 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8831 You can't nest anything into them.
8835 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Itemize
8847 \begin_layout Itemize
8853 \begin_layout Itemize
8859 \begin_layout Itemize
8865 \begin_layout Itemize
8871 \begin_layout Itemize
8877 \begin_layout Itemize
8883 \begin_layout Itemize
8889 \begin_layout Itemize
8895 \begin_layout Itemize
8901 \begin_layout Itemize
8907 \begin_layout Itemize
8913 \begin_layout Itemize
8917 \begin_inset space ~
8923 \begin_layout Itemize
8930 \begin_layout Standard
8931 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8939 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8949 \begin_inset space ~
8952 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8953 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8954 nested section headings violate this.
8962 \begin_layout Subsection
8963 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8964 \begin_inset Index idx
8967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8968 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8976 \begin_layout Standard
8977 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8978 affected by nesting anyhow.
8982 \begin_layout Itemize
8986 \begin_layout Itemize
8990 \begin_layout Itemize
8994 \begin_layout Standard
8996 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9004 Figures and tables in
9008 are not affected by this.
9013 Have a look at section
9014 \begin_inset space ~
9018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9020 reference "sec:Floats"
9024 for more information about
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9033 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9034 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9039 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9047 of its own, it behaves just like a
9048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9055 paragraph environment.
9056 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9060 \begin_layout Standard
9061 Here's an example with a table:
9064 \begin_layout Enumerate
9069 \begin_layout Enumerate
9070 This is (a) and it's nested.
9074 \begin_layout Standard
9075 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9081 \begin_layout Standard
9083 \begin_inset Tabular
9084 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9085 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9171 \begin_layout Standard
9172 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9179 \begin_layout Enumerate
9181 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 \begin_layout Standard
9190 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9193 \begin_layout Enumerate
9198 \begin_layout Enumerate
9199 This is (a) and it's nested.
9203 \begin_layout Standard
9204 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9210 \begin_layout Standard
9212 \begin_inset Tabular
9213 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9214 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9215 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9216 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9300 \begin_layout Standard
9301 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9307 \begin_layout Enumerate
9314 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9317 \begin_layout Enumerate
9321 \begin_layout Standard
9322 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9326 \begin_layout Standard
9327 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9330 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9333 \begin_layout Enumerate
9338 \begin_layout Enumerate
9339 This is (a) and it's nested.
9342 \begin_layout Standard
9343 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9349 \begin_layout Standard
9351 \begin_inset Tabular
9352 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9353 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9354 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9355 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9440 \begin_layout Standard
9441 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9447 \begin_layout Enumerate
9449 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9456 \begin_layout Enumerate
9460 \begin_layout Standard
9461 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9467 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9468 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9472 \begin_layout Subsection
9473 Usage and General Features
9476 \begin_layout Standard
9477 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9478 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9487 is the innermost possible depth.
9488 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9491 \begin_layout Enumerate
9492 level #1 – outermost
9496 \begin_layout Enumerate
9501 \begin_layout Enumerate
9506 \begin_layout Enumerate
9511 \begin_layout Itemize
9516 \begin_layout Itemize
9525 \begin_layout Standard
9526 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9527 both of them in the example.
9528 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9538 For example, if we tried to nest another
9543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9550 , we would get errors.
9553 \begin_layout Subsection
9555 \begin_inset Index idx
9558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9567 \begin_layout Standard
9568 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9569 We have several examples of nested environments.
9570 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9574 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9575 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9578 \begin_layout Labeling
9579 \labelwidthstring MMM
9580 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9589 \begin_layout Labeling
9590 \labelwidthstring MMM
9591 #2-a This is level #2.
9592 We created it by using
9595 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9601 arg "depth-increment"
9608 \begin_layout Labeling
9609 \labelwidthstring MMM
9610 #3-a This is level #3.
9611 This time, we just enter
9618 arg "depth-increment"
9622 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9626 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9632 arg "depth-increment"
9639 \begin_layout Standard
9644 environment, nested inside of
9645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9653 So, it's at level #4.
9654 We did this by entering
9657 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9663 arg "depth-increment"
9666 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9671 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9687 \begin_layout Standard
9692 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9695 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9701 \begin_layout Labeling
9702 \labelwidthstring MMM
9703 #4-a This is level #4.
9707 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9710 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9715 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9719 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9724 keep nesting things inside
9725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9736 \begin_layout Labeling
9737 \labelwidthstring MMM
9738 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9743 \begin_layout Labeling
9744 \labelwidthstring MMM
9745 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9746 and this is level #6.
9747 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9751 \begin_layout Labeling
9752 \labelwidthstring MMM
9753 #5-b Back to level #5.
9757 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9763 arg "depth-decrement"
9770 \begin_layout Labeling
9771 \labelwidthstring MMM
9775 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9781 arg "depth-decrement"
9784 , we're back at level #4.
9788 \begin_layout Labeling
9789 \labelwidthstring MMM
9790 #3-b Back to level #3.
9791 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9795 \begin_layout Labeling
9796 \labelwidthstring MMM
9797 #2-b Back to level #2.
9802 \begin_layout Labeling
9803 \labelwidthstring MMM
9804 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9805 After this sentence, we will enter
9809 and change the paragraph environment back to
9816 \begin_layout Standard
9817 We could have also used the
9833 environment in place of the
9838 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9842 Example 2: Inheritance
9845 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9846 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9849 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9858 arg "depth-increment"
9862 \begin_inset Newline newline
9865 which, we will change to the
9873 \begin_layout Enumerate
9878 environment, at level #2.
9881 \begin_layout Enumerate
9882 Notice how the nested
9886 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9890 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9894 \begin_layout Standard
9895 We ended this example by entering
9900 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9904 and reset the nesting depth by using
9907 arg "depth-decrement"
9913 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9914 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9923 \begin_inset Argument 1
9926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9927 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9935 \begin_layout Enumerate
9936 This is level #1, in an
9940 paragraph environment.
9941 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9945 \begin_layout Enumerate
9950 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9956 arg "depth-increment"
9960 Now, what happens if we nest an
9964 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9965 label be? An asterisk?
9969 \begin_layout Itemize
9979 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9980 So, its label is a bullet.
9981 (We got here by using
9984 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9990 arg "depth-increment"
9993 , then changing the environment to
10001 \begin_layout Itemize
10002 Here's level #4, produced using
10005 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10011 arg "depth-increment"
10015 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10020 \begin_layout Enumerate
10022 to get to level #5.
10023 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10028 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10032 , because we are in the
10040 environment (that is, it is an
10055 \begin_layout Enumerate
10060 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10061 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10065 \begin_layout Enumerate
10066 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10069 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10072 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10075 \begin_layout Enumerate
10079 arg "depth-decrement"
10082 to decrease the depth after the next
10085 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10092 \begin_layout Enumerate
10094 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10099 \begin_layout Enumerate
10101 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10102 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10106 \begin_layout Enumerate
10107 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10116 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10121 reset the counter for the label.
10125 \begin_layout Enumerate
10129 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10135 arg "depth-decrement"
10138 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10139 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10140 into the twofold-nested
10148 \begin_layout Enumerate
10149 The same thing happens if we do another
10152 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10158 arg "depth-decrement"
10161 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10164 \begin_layout Standard
10165 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10170 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10181 The number of other
10185 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10192 The same rule applies for the
10196 environment, as well.
10199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10200 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10203 \begin_layout Enumerate
10204 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10205 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10206 the same detail with how we did it.
10215 \begin_layout Standard
10223 arg "depth-increment"
10230 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10231 the example in parentheses someplace.
10232 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10233 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10234 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10238 \begin_layout Enumerate
10243 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10247 \begin_layout Verse
10248 Now we will add verse.
10249 \begin_inset Newline newline
10252 It will get much worse.
10253 \begin_inset Newline newline
10263 arg "depth-increment"
10273 \begin_layout Verse
10274 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10275 \begin_inset Newline newline
10278 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10279 \begin_inset Newline newline
10285 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10293 \begin_layout Verse
10294 Here comes a table:
10298 \begin_layout Standard
10299 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10305 \begin_layout Standard
10307 \begin_inset Tabular
10308 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10309 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10310 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10311 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10396 \begin_layout Verse
10400 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10410 arg "depth-increment"
10416 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10422 \begin_inset Newline newline
10430 arg "depth-decrement"
10437 \begin_layout Enumerate
10442 : level #1) This is another item.
10443 Note that selecting a
10447 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10448 3 times to put the table inside the
10456 \begin_layout Quotation
10457 We're now ending the
10461 list and changing to
10466 We're still at level #1.
10467 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10468 The next set of paragraphs is a
10469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10476 We will nest both the
10483 \begin_inset space ~
10488 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10492 for the letter body.
10496 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10499 to preserve the depth.
10500 Remember that you need to use
10503 arg "newline-insert newline"
10506 to create multiple lines inside the
10513 \begin_inset space ~
10523 \begin_layout Right Address
10525 \begin_inset Newline newline
10528 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10529 \begin_inset Newline newline
10535 \begin_layout Address
10537 \begin_inset space ~
10543 \begin_layout Quotation
10544 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10548 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10549 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10550 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10551 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10552 as soon as possible.
10553 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10556 \begin_layout Quotation
10557 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10558 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10559 with your order, along with payment.
10562 \begin_layout Quotation
10563 We thank you again for your patience.
10566 \begin_layout Address
10568 \begin_inset Newline newline
10575 \begin_layout Quotation
10576 That ends that example!
10579 \begin_layout Standard
10580 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10581 gives you a lot of power with just
10583 We could have easily nested an
10604 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10607 \begin_layout Subsection
10609 \begin_inset Index idx
10612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10613 Nesting ! Separation
10619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10621 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10628 \begin_layout Standard
10629 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10631 For example you need two different enumerations:
10634 \begin_layout Enumerate
10639 \begin_layout Enumerate
10644 \begin_layout Enumerate
10648 \begin_layout Standard
10649 \begin_inset Separator plain
10655 \begin_layout Itemize
10661 \begin_layout Standard
10662 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10668 \begin_layout Enumerate
10672 \begin_layout Enumerate
10676 \begin_layout Enumerate
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10681 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10682 list item and use the menu
10684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10685 Separated <Name> Above
10689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10690 Separated <Name> Below
10693 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10694 ) and before or behind it the
10696 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10699 \begin_layout Standard
10700 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10701 (red arrow in LyX).
10702 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10703 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10706 \begin_layout Standard
10707 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10710 arg "paragraph-break"
10717 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10720 \begin_layout Section
10721 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10722 \begin_inset Index idx
10725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10734 \begin_layout Standard
10735 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10736 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10738 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10739 be broken at the end of a line.
10740 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10744 \begin_layout Subsection
10746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10748 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10753 \begin_inset Index idx
10756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10765 \begin_layout Standard
10766 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10767 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10768 ) not to break the line at
10770 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10773 \begin_layout Quote
10774 Further documentation is given in section
10775 \begin_inset Newline newline
10779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10781 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10789 \begin_layout Standard
10790 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10805 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10814 A protected space is set with
10816 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10817 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10819 \begin_inset space ~
10827 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10833 \begin_layout Subsection
10835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10837 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10842 \begin_inset Index idx
10845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10846 Spacing ! Horizontal
10854 \begin_layout Standard
10855 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10858 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10862 The length units are listed in Appendix
10863 \begin_inset space ~
10867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10869 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10880 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10885 \begin_inset Index idx
10888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10889 Spaces ! Inter-word
10897 \begin_layout Standard
10898 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10899 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10900 at the ends of sentences.
10901 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10902 automatically takes care about this.
10903 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10904 followed by a period; see section
10905 \begin_inset space ~
10909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10911 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10916 To insert a normal space, select
10918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10919 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10921 \begin_inset space ~
10929 arg "space-insert normal"
10935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10939 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10944 \begin_inset Index idx
10947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10956 \begin_layout Standard
10958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10965 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10974 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10975 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10976 inside abbreviations:
10979 \begin_layout Quote
10981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10985 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10988 \begin_layout Standard
10989 or between values and units.
10990 Compare for example this:
10991 \begin_inset Newline newline
10995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10999 \begin_inset Newline newline
11002 10 kg (normal space
11005 \begin_layout Standard
11006 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11009 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11011 \begin_inset space ~
11019 arg "space-insert thin"
11025 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11029 \begin_layout Standard
11030 You can also insert the following space types:
11033 \begin_layout Description
11035 \begin_inset space ~
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11042 space A line with a
11043 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11047 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11051 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11054 negative thin space between the arrows.
11057 \begin_layout Description
11059 \begin_inset space ~
11063 \begin_inset space ~
11066 space A line with a
11067 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11071 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11075 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11078 negative medium space between the arrows.
11081 \begin_layout Description
11083 \begin_inset space ~
11087 \begin_inset space ~
11090 space A line with a
11091 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11095 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11099 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11102 negative thick space between the arrows.
11105 \begin_layout Description
11107 \begin_inset space ~
11111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11115 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11119 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11123 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11127 \begin_inset space ~
11131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11134 em) space between the arrows.
11137 \begin_layout Description
11139 \begin_inset space ~
11143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11147 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11151 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11155 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11159 \begin_inset space ~
11163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11166 em) space between the arrows.
11169 \begin_layout Description
11171 \begin_inset space ~
11175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11179 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11183 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11187 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11191 \begin_inset space ~
11195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11198 em) space between the arrows.
11201 \begin_layout Description
11203 \begin_inset space ~
11207 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11211 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11216 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11223 cm space between the arrows.
11226 \begin_layout Standard
11228 \begin_inset space ~
11232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11234 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11238 lists the different space sizes.
11241 \begin_layout Standard
11242 \begin_inset Float table
11249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11250 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11255 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11259 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11269 \begin_inset Tabular
11270 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11271 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11272 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11273 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11385 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11389 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11548 \begin_inset Index idx
11551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11560 \begin_layout Standard
11561 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11562 feature for adding extra space
11563 in a uniform fashion.
11564 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11565 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11566 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11567 equally between themselves.
11570 \begin_layout Standard
11571 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11574 \begin_layout Quote
11576 This is on the left side
11577 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11580 This is on the right
11583 \begin_layout Quote
11586 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11590 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11596 \begin_layout Quote
11599 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11603 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11607 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11613 \begin_layout Standard
11614 That was an example in the
11620 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11624 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11628 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11631 is one in a standard paragraph.
11632 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11636 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11639 \begin_layout Standard
11640 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11643 \begin_inset space ~
11648 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11651 \begin_layout Standard
11653 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11657 \begin_inset space ~
11663 \begin_layout Standard
11665 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11669 \begin_inset space ~
11675 \begin_layout Standard
11677 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11681 \begin_inset space ~
11687 \begin_layout Standard
11689 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11693 \begin_inset space ~
11699 \begin_layout Standard
11701 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11705 \begin_inset space ~
11711 \begin_layout Standard
11713 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11717 \begin_inset space ~
11723 \begin_layout Standard
11724 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11732 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11736 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11738 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11739 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11743 option in the space dialog.
11751 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11755 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11760 \begin_inset Index idx
11763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11772 \begin_layout Standard
11773 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11774 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11777 \begin_layout Standard
11778 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11781 What is correct English?:
11782 \begin_inset Newline newline
11786 \begin_inset Newline newline
11790 \begin_inset space ~
11793 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11794 \begin_inset Newline newline
11798 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11809 \begin_inset Newline newline
11813 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11824 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11830 \begin_layout Standard
11832 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11837 \begin_inset space ~
11841 \begin_inset space ~
11845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11849 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11852 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11856 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11862 \begin_inset space ~
11866 \begin_inset space ~
11870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11873 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11882 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11883 That is why it is named
11884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11892 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11893 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11897 \begin_layout Subsection
11899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11901 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11906 \begin_inset Index idx
11909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11918 \begin_layout Standard
11919 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11921 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11922 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11924 \begin_inset space ~
11930 There you find the following sizes:
11933 \begin_layout Standard
11946 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11947 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11952 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11955 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11957 \begin_inset space ~
11963 \begin_inset Index idx
11966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11967 Document ! Settings
11972 for the paragraph separation.
11973 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11984 \begin_layout Standard
11990 \begin_inset Index idx
11993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11999 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12000 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12005 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12006 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12015 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12024 s are described in section
12025 \begin_inset space ~
12029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12031 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12040 If there are several
12044 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12045 You can therefore use
12049 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12057 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12058 \begin_inset space ~
12062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12064 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12071 \begin_layout Standard
12072 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12082 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12083 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12095 \begin_layout Subsection
12096 Paragraph Alignment
12097 \begin_inset Index idx
12100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12101 Paragraph ! Alignment
12109 \begin_layout Standard
12110 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12112 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12115 dialog (toolbar button
12118 arg "layout-paragraph"
12122 There are five possibilities:
12125 \begin_layout Itemize
12133 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12139 \begin_layout Itemize
12147 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12153 \begin_layout Itemize
12161 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12167 \begin_layout Itemize
12175 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12181 \begin_layout Itemize
12189 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12195 \begin_layout Standard
12196 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12197 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12198 the left and right margins.
12199 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12202 \begin_layout Standard
12204 This paragraph is right aligned,
12207 \begin_layout Standard
12209 this one is centered,
12212 \begin_layout Standard
12214 this one is left aligned.
12217 \begin_layout Subsection
12219 \begin_inset Index idx
12222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12223 Page breaks ! Forced
12229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12231 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12238 \begin_layout Standard
12239 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12240 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12241 force a page break where you want one.
12242 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12243 is good at page breaking.
12244 Only if you use a lot of
12248 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12249 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12252 \begin_layout Standard
12253 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12254 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12258 have to change the page breaking.
12261 \begin_layout Standard
12262 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12264 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12266 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12267 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12269 \begin_inset space ~
12275 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12278 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12280 \begin_inset space ~
12285 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12287 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12288 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12291 \begin_layout Standard
12292 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12293 at the top of a page.
12294 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12296 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12297 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12298 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12302 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12306 to learn more about
12313 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12317 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12322 \begin_inset Index idx
12325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12326 Page breaks ! Clear
12334 \begin_layout Standard
12335 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12336 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12337 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12338 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12339 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12342 \begin_layout Standard
12343 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12346 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12348 \begin_inset space ~
12354 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12357 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12359 \begin_inset space ~
12363 \begin_inset space ~
12368 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12369 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12372 \begin_layout Subsection
12374 \begin_inset Index idx
12377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12386 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12393 \begin_layout Standard
12394 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12396 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12399 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12401 \begin_inset space ~
12405 \begin_inset space ~
12413 arg "newline-insert newline"
12417 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12420 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12422 \begin_inset space ~
12426 \begin_inset space ~
12434 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12437 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12439 This is useful to avoid
12440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12447 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12450 \begin_layout Standard
12451 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12452 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12454 very good at line breaking.
12455 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12456 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12457 \begin_inset space ~
12461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12463 reference "sec:Quote"
12468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12470 reference "sec:Verse"
12475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12477 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12484 \begin_layout Subsection
12486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12488 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12493 \begin_inset Index idx
12496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12505 \begin_layout Standard
12507 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12518 \begin_layout Standard
12522 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12523 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12525 \begin_inset space ~
12530 you can insert horizontal lines.
12531 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12532 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12533 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12536 \begin_layout Standard
12538 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12549 \begin_layout Section
12550 Characters and Symbols
12553 \begin_layout Standard
12554 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12555 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12556 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12564 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12568 for information on how this is done.
12571 \begin_layout Standard
12572 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12577 dialog via the menu
12579 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12580 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12586 \begin_layout Standard
12587 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12595 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12596 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12598 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12606 \begin_layout Section
12607 Fonts and Text Styles
12608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12610 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12617 \begin_layout Subsection
12619 \begin_inset Index idx
12622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12631 \begin_layout Standard
12632 There are two types of fonts:
12635 \begin_layout Description
12637 \begin_inset space ~
12641 \begin_inset Index idx
12644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12650 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12655 characters) in the font.
12656 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12657 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12658 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12659 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12660 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12661 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12662 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12663 \begin_inset Newline newline
12666 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12667 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12668 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12669 sizes than at small ones.
12670 \begin_inset Newline newline
12684 \begin_inset space ~
12692 \begin_layout Description
12694 \begin_inset space ~
12698 \begin_inset Index idx
12701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12707 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12708 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12709 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12710 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12711 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12712 image manipulation program.
12713 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12714 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12715 \begin_inset space ~
12718 pixels high up to 34
12719 \begin_inset space ~
12722 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12723 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12724 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12726 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12727 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12728 \begin_inset Newline newline
12731 Bitmap fonts are named
12734 \begin_inset space ~
12739 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12742 \begin_layout Standard
12743 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12744 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12745 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12746 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12747 use scalable fonts.
12750 \begin_layout Standard
12751 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12754 \begin_layout Standard
12755 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12757 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12759 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12762 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12763 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12764 font to emphasize text, you use an
12765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12773 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12775 In \SpecialChar LyX
12776 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12780 \begin_layout Subsection
12783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12785 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12792 \begin_layout Standard
12793 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12794 used its own fonts.
12795 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12796 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12799 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12800 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12801 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12802 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12803 to a word processor.
12804 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12805 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12806 files are very portable across
12807 different machines.
12808 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12809 has increased a lot
12810 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12813 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12815 \begin_inset space ~
12819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12821 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12826 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12827 code in the document
12828 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12831 \begin_layout Standard
12832 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12833 engines that are also able directly
12834 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12836 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12838 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12840 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12841 that is installed on your system.
12842 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12845 \begin_layout Standard
12846 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12854 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12855 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12863 \begin_layout Subsection
12864 Document Font and Font size
12865 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12867 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12872 \begin_inset Index idx
12875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12882 \begin_inset Index idx
12885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12894 \begin_layout Standard
12895 You can set the document fonts in the
12897 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12901 \begin_inset Index idx
12904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12905 Document ! Settings
12915 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12916 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12919 \begin_inset space ~
12928 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12930 \begin_inset space ~
12933 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12936 \begin_layout Standard
12941 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12942 This requires that you use
12954 as the output format, i.
12955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12959 \begin_inset space \space{}
12962 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12963 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12964 installed (see section
12965 \begin_inset space ~
12969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12971 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12976 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12978 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12979 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12981 \begin_inset space ~
12984 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12985 cannot determine the family.
12986 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12987 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12990 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12993 \begin_layout Standard
12994 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12995 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13000 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13006 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13008 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13010 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13013 font encoding, this is
13014 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13015 , depending on the document language,
13018 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13019 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13027 \begin_inset space ~
13033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13043 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13044 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13052 \begin_inset space ~
13058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13066 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13087 European Computer Modern
13090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13098 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13101 \begin_layout Standard
13106 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13107 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13112 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13115 \begin_inset space ~
13120 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13126 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13127 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13130 \begin_layout Itemize
13134 \begin_inset space ~
13139 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13152 \begin_inset space ~
13157 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13158 community in order to replace
13162 as the default font.
13163 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13164 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13167 \begin_inset space ~
13180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13181 One difference is improved kerning.
13189 \begin_layout Itemize
13190 If you do not like the look of
13198 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13203 \begin_inset space ~
13209 \begin_inset space ~
13219 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13220 \begin_inset space ~
13223 serif and typewriter fonts,
13227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13228 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13235 \begin_inset space ~
13244 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13249 \begin_inset space \space{}
13257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13261 \begin_inset space \space{}
13267 \begin_inset space ~
13275 \begin_inset space ~
13285 but you can also select your own.
13286 \begin_inset Newline newline
13289 The differences between roman,
13292 \begin_inset space ~
13301 fonts are explained in section
13302 \begin_inset space ~
13306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13308 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13313 \begin_inset Newline newline
13319 \begin_inset space ~
13324 was originally designed for newspapers.
13325 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13326 into the small newspaper columns.
13330 \begin_inset space ~
13335 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13338 \begin_layout Standard
13339 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13352 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13357 depends on the class you are using.
13358 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13361 \begin_layout Standard
13362 Note that the font size is the
13367 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13368 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13369 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13370 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13373 \begin_inset space ~
13379 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13380 \begin_inset space ~
13384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13386 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13393 \begin_layout Standard
13397 \begin_inset space ~
13402 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13404 \begin_inset space ~
13407 serif or typewriter.
13412 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13422 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13425 \begin_layout Standard
13430 LaTeX font encoding
13432 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13433 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13439 \begin_inset Index idx
13442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13450 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13452 \begin_inset space ~
13456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13458 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13465 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13466 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13467 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13471 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13479 \begin_layout Standard
13480 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13482 Use Old Style Figures
13486 Use True Small Caps
13489 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13492 Use Old Style Figures
13494 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13496 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13504 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13508 Use True Small Caps
13510 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13511 of scaled capitals.
13512 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13513 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13514 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13518 \begin_layout Standard
13520 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13521 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13522 provided by the font package (or the
13526 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13531 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13537 \begin_layout Standard
13542 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13543 a font to display the script characters.
13547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13548 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13554 \begin_inset Index idx
13557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13564 So this has no effect for the document language
13580 \begin_layout Standard
13583 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13585 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13586 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13592 \begin_inset Index idx
13595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13597 packages ! microtype
13606 \begin_layout Standard
13609 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13611 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13616 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13617 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13623 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13624 \begin_inset space ~
13628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13630 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13640 \begin_layout Standard
13641 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13645 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13653 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13658 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13659 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13661 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13663 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13666 dialog, see section
13667 \begin_inset space ~
13671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13673 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13685 \begin_layout Subsection
13689 \begin_layout Standard
13690 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13691 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13693 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13694 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13695 choose a math font in the dialog
13697 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13701 \begin_inset Index idx
13704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13705 Document ! Settings
13711 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13712 automatically selects a math font.
13713 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13714 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13723 \begin_inset space ~
13729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13734 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13735 document font is available.
13738 \begin_layout Standard
13739 Note that the math font will not be used for
13743 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13749 or by the insertion of the command
13756 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13757 \begin_inset space ~
13761 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13762 while the math characters do not.
13764 \begin_inset space ~
13767 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13770 \begin_inset space ~
13778 \begin_inset space ~
13783 in the document font settings.
13786 \begin_layout Standard
13787 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13788 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13789 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13790 font (in most cases
13791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13797 \begin_inset space ~
13803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13806 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13807 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13815 \begin_inset space ~
13821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13827 \begin_layout Subsection
13829 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13831 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13835 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13839 name "subsec:charstyles"
13846 \begin_inset Index idx
13849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13856 \begin_inset Index idx
13859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13868 \begin_layout Standard
13869 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13870 automatically changes the
13871 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13874 style for certain paragraph environments.
13876 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13877 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13879 This is where we meet the concept of
13885 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13887 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13891 \begin_layout Standard
13893 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13898 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13900 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13913 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13922 e., available with all document classes.
13923 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13927 for specific purposes.
13928 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13931 \begin_layout Standard
13933 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13934 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13944 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13948 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13961 — you customized the
13966 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13967 among them, encourage the use of
13979 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13980 \begin_inset space ~
13984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13986 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13991 Rather than fiddling with
13995 , they encourage the use of
13999 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14004 \begin_inset Quotes els
14008 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14011 ), not their form (
14012 \begin_inset Quotes els
14016 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14020 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14021 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14022 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14023 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14024 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14025 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14031 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14035 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14036 With a semantic markup (such as
14040 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14045 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14047 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14048 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14051 \begin_layout Standard
14053 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14054 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14055 by \SpecialChar LyX
14061 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14063 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14064 Builtin Text Styles
14065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14067 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14074 \begin_layout Standard
14076 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14077 The two builtin text styles can be
14078 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14082 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14086 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14087 both of these styles
14090 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14098 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14104 \begin_layout Standard
14109 style, do one of the following:
14112 \begin_layout Itemize
14113 click on the toolbar button
14122 \begin_layout Itemize
14123 use the key binding
14130 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14134 \begin_layout Itemize
14136 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14144 arg "dialog-show character"
14150 arg "dialog-show character"
14153 ) as described in section
14154 \begin_inset space ~
14158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14160 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14169 \begin_layout Standard
14170 These commands are all toggles.
14175 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14178 \begin_layout Standard
14179 One typically uses the
14183 style for proper names.
14185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14192 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14198 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14202 \begin_layout Standard
14204 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14209 is producing text in
14213 , but the definition can be changed.
14218 \begin_layout Standard
14220 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14222 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14230 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14237 \begin_layout Itemize
14238 clicking on the toolbar button
14247 \begin_layout Itemize
14248 using the keybindings
14255 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14259 \begin_layout Itemize
14261 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14269 arg "dialog-show character"
14275 arg "dialog-show character"
14278 ) as described in section
14279 \begin_inset space ~
14283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14285 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14294 \begin_layout Standard
14299 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14301 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14303 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14306 packages use a different font
14307 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14308 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14314 \begin_layout Standard
14315 We've been using the
14319 style all over the place in this document.
14320 Here's one more example:
14323 \begin_layout Quotation
14327 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14329 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14335 \begin_layout Standard
14336 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14337 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14338 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14339 the common tendency to overuse
14340 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14342 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14347 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14351 \begin_layout Standard
14353 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14354 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14355 only as font changes and integrated in the
14363 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14366 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14373 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14375 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14379 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14382 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14384 \begin_inset space ~
14387 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14389 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14395 arg "dialog-show character"
14401 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14403 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14409 arg "dialog-show character"
14413 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14417 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14419 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14423 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14430 \begin_layout Standard
14432 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14433 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14435 \begin_inset space ~
14439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14441 reference "subsec:Modules"
14448 ), or local layout settings (see section
14449 \begin_inset space ~
14453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14455 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14460 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14464 markup for specific functions.
14465 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14470 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14480 \begin_inset Quotes els
14484 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14490 \begin_layout Standard
14492 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14493 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14495 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14501 \begin_layout Standard
14503 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14504 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14509 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14510 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14511 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14516 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14517 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14522 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14530 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14531 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14532 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14533 \begin_inset Flex Code
14536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14538 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14547 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14552 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14561 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14566 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14575 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14576 on screen their formal appearance.
14581 \begin_layout Subsection
14583 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14589 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14595 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14597 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14603 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14605 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14611 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14616 \begin_inset Index idx
14619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14628 \begin_layout Standard
14629 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14630 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14633 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14635 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14637 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14641 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14642 the properties of text passages
14643 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14647 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14648 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14649 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14650 from ordinary dialog.
14651 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14655 \begin_layout Standard
14657 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14658 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14659 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14660 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14661 the properties of the respective text passages.
14666 comes in as a last resort.
14671 \begin_layout Standard
14672 Before we document how to
14673 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14674 use custom character style
14675 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14676 tweak the text properties
14678 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14679 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14681 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14685 \begin_inset Newline newline
14688 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14689 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14692 \begin_layout Standard
14694 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14695 use custom character styles
14696 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14697 tweak text properties
14700 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14703 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14705 \begin_inset space ~
14708 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14710 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14716 arg "dialog-show character"
14721 dialog or press the toolbar button
14724 arg "dialog-show character"
14729 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14732 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14733 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14735 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14738 property that you can choose.
14739 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14742 \begin_inset space ~
14747 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14749 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14753 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14755 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14760 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14761 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14762 environments all at once.
14765 \begin_layout Standard
14767 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14769 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14772 properties, and their options (in addition to
14775 \begin_inset space ~
14781 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14785 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14793 \begin_layout Labeling
14794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14808 The possible options are:
14812 \begin_layout Labeling
14813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14818 This is the Roman font family.
14819 Normally a serif font.
14820 It's also the default family.
14830 \begin_layout Labeling
14831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14835 \begin_inset space ~
14842 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14854 \begin_layout Labeling
14855 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14862 This is the Typewriter font family.
14868 arg "font-typewriter"
14874 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14878 \begin_layout Standard
14880 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14881 The general differences of these families are:
14884 \begin_layout Itemize
14886 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14891 fonts use characters with serifs.
14892 These are the small
14893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14900 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14901 The following example shows the difference:
14902 \begin_inset Newline newline
14906 \begin_inset Newline newline
14911 text without serifs
14914 \begin_inset Newline newline
14917 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14918 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14925 \begin_layout Itemize
14927 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14932 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14933 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14934 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14937 \begin_layout Itemize
14939 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14952 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14970 \begin_inset Newline newline
14974 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14979 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14990 \begin_inset Note Note
14993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14995 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14996 For more on phantoms see section
14997 \begin_inset space ~
15001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15003 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15013 \begin_inset Newline newline
15022 \begin_layout Labeling
15023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15028 This corresponds to the print weight.
15033 \begin_layout Labeling
15034 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15039 This is the Medium font series.
15040 It's also the default series.
15043 \begin_layout Labeling
15044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15051 This is the Bold font series.
15064 \begin_layout Labeling
15065 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15070 As the name implies.
15075 \begin_layout Labeling
15076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15081 This is the Upright font shape.
15082 It's also the default shape.
15085 \begin_layout Labeling
15086 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15096 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15101 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15106 s the Italic font shape
15112 \begin_layout Labeling
15113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15120 This is the Slanted font shape
15122 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15123 , this is different from italic).
15126 \begin_layout Labeling
15127 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15131 \begin_inset space ~
15138 This is the Small caps font shape
15145 \begin_layout Labeling
15146 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15151 Alters the text color.
15152 Note that not all DVI
15153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15155 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15158 viewers are able to display colors.
15160 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15164 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15166 \begin_inset space ~
15173 , which means that the document default color set in
15175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15176 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15182 \begin_inset space ~
15188 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15190 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15194 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15274 \begin_inset Index idx
15277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15286 \begin_layout Labeling
15287 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15292 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15293 the language of the document.
15294 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15295 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15296 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15299 in blue to indicate the change
15300 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15301 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15305 \begin_inset Newline newline
15308 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15310 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15311 When using the spell checking (see section
15312 \begin_inset space ~
15316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15318 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15322 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15323 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15325 \begin_inset Newline newline
15328 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15330 Exclude from Spellchecking
15333 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15336 \begin_layout Labeling
15337 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15342 Alters the size of the font.
15344 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15346 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15350 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15353 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15354 document font size.
15355 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15356 the details, but a general description of what
15362 \begin_layout Labeling
15363 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15384 arg "font-size tiny"
15390 \begin_layout Labeling
15391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15412 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15418 \begin_layout Labeling
15419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15440 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15446 \begin_layout Labeling
15447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15468 arg "font-size small"
15474 \begin_layout Labeling
15475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15489 It's also the default size.
15493 arg "font-size normal"
15499 \begin_layout Labeling
15500 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15521 arg "font-size large"
15527 \begin_layout Labeling
15528 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15549 arg "font-size larger"
15555 \begin_layout Labeling
15556 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15577 arg "font-size largest"
15583 \begin_layout Labeling
15584 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15605 arg "font-size huge"
15611 \begin_layout Labeling
15612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15633 arg "font-size giant"
15639 \begin_layout Labeling
15640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15645 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15665 arg "font-size increase"
15671 \begin_layout Labeling
15672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15677 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15697 arg "font-size decrease"
15704 \begin_layout Standard
15709 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15710 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15712 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15713 — use those instead.
15714 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15717 \begin_layout Labeling
15718 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15720 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15730 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15731 change a few other things at the character level
15732 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15733 have text passages being underlined
15737 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15738 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15739 days, when you could not change fonts.
15740 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15741 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15742 because some people
15746 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15753 \begin_layout Labeling
15754 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15756 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15763 This is text with emphasize on
15766 This might seem like the same as
15770 , but it is actually a bit different.
15776 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15778 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15779 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15783 \begin_layout Labeling
15784 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15786 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15791 Don't use underlining.
15796 \begin_layout Labeling
15797 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15799 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15803 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15811 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15813 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15822 arg "font-underline"
15828 \begin_inset Newline newline
15832 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15835 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15836 when you could not change fonts.
15837 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15838 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15839 because some people
15843 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15848 \begin_layout Labeling
15849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15853 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15855 \begin_inset space ~
15864 This is text with Double under
15865 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15867 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15876 arg "font-underunderline"
15880 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15882 \begin_inset Newline newline
15885 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15886 about double underbar
15891 \begin_layout Labeling
15892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15896 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15898 \begin_inset space ~
15907 This is text with Wavy under
15908 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15910 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15919 arg "font-underwave"
15923 \begin_inset Newline newline
15926 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15927 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15928 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15933 \begin_layout Labeling
15934 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15936 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15941 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15947 \begin_layout Labeling
15948 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15950 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15955 Don't use strikethrough.
15958 \begin_layout Labeling
15959 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15963 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15965 \begin_inset space ~
15969 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15977 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15979 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15980 Single strikethrough
15988 arg "font-strikeout"
15992 \begin_inset Newline newline
15995 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15996 changed in the meantime.
15999 \begin_layout Labeling
16000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16002 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16006 \begin_inset space ~
16010 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16012 \begin_inset space ~
16016 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16024 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16026 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16032 \begin_inset Newline newline
16035 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16039 \begin_layout Standard
16041 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16042 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16043 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16044 \begin_inset space ~
16048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16050 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16057 \begin_layout Itemize
16059 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16066 This is text with emphasize on
16071 \begin_layout Itemize
16075 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16082 This is text with Noun on.
16084 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16091 , this is a logical attribute.
16092 Normally it's equivalent to
16095 \begin_inset space ~
16105 \begin_layout Standard
16106 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16107 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16109 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16114 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16115 chosen a new character style
16116 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16117 applied a text property
16120 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16123 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16125 \begin_inset space ~
16128 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16130 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16136 arg "dialog-show character"
16144 arg "dialog-show character"
16147 ) dialog, the settings are
16148 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16152 You can activate the
16153 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16155 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16156 last applied properties
16158 by using the toolbar button
16161 arg "textstyle-apply"
16165 The button lets you apply
16166 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16167 your custom character style
16168 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16171 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16173 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16174 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16175 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16176 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16181 \begin_layout Standard
16182 To completely reset the
16183 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16185 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16186 text properties of a selection
16188 to the default, use
16189 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16191 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16201 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16206 from the menu of the toolbar button
16209 arg "textstyle-apply"
16216 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16217 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16218 you just set the shape to
16219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16237 \begin_inset space ~
16251 \begin_layout Standard
16253 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16254 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16262 \begin_inset space ~
16274 \begin_layout Itemize
16276 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16289 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16307 \begin_inset Newline newline
16311 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16325 \begin_inset Note Note
16328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16329 For more on phantoms see section
16330 \begin_inset space ~
16334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16336 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16346 \begin_inset Newline newline
16352 \begin_layout Itemize
16354 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16359 fonts use characters with serifs.
16360 These are the small
16361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16368 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16369 The following example shows the difference:
16370 \begin_inset Newline newline
16374 \begin_inset Newline newline
16379 text without serifs
16382 \begin_inset Newline newline
16385 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16386 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16393 \begin_layout Itemize
16395 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16400 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16401 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16402 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16407 \begin_layout Standard
16409 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16417 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16418 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16421 \begin_inset space ~
16426 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16427 the property to be removed.
16428 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16429 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16430 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16448 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16449 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16457 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16461 \begin_inset space ~
16466 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16477 If you, for example, set
16478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16496 \begin_inset space ~
16501 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16510 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16515 \begin_layout Standard
16517 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16520 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16521 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16524 \begin_layout Section
16525 Printing and Previewing
16528 \begin_layout Subsection
16532 \begin_layout Standard
16533 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16534 using \SpecialChar LyX
16535 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16536 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16537 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16538 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16540 Additional Features
16545 \begin_layout Standard
16547 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16550 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16551 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16552 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16555 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16556 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16557 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16558 to turn your writing into printable output.
16559 This happens in two stages:
16562 \begin_layout Enumerate
16563 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16564 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16566 a file with the extension,
16567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16581 \begin_layout Enumerate
16582 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16583 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16584 to use the commands in the
16588 file to produce printable output.
16591 \begin_layout Subsection
16592 Output file formats
16593 \begin_inset Index idx
16596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16605 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16612 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16613 Simple text (ASCII)
16614 \begin_inset Index idx
16617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16618 File formats ! ASCII
16626 \begin_layout Standard
16627 This file type has the extension
16628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16640 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16644 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16651 \begin_layout Standard
16652 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16654 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16655 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16657 \begin_inset space ~
16663 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16664 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16665 bibliography (section
16666 \begin_inset space ~
16670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16672 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16677 If your document includes such material, use
16679 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16680 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16682 \begin_inset space ~
16686 \begin_inset space ~
16690 \begin_inset space ~
16698 \begin_inset space ~
16702 \begin_inset space ~
16708 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16709 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16715 \begin_inset Index idx
16718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16719 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16728 \begin_layout Standard
16729 This file type has the extension
16730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16741 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16744 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16745 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16746 -Errors or to process it manually
16747 with console commands.
16748 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16749 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16750 's temporary directory whenever you
16751 view or export your document.
16754 \begin_layout Standard
16755 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16756 -file using the menu
16758 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16759 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16763 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16764 export variants are explained in section
16765 \begin_inset space ~
16769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16771 reference "subsec:Export"
16778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16780 \begin_inset Index idx
16783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16792 \begin_layout Standard
16793 This file type has the extension
16794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16814 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16815 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16816 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16820 \begin_layout Standard
16821 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16822 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16823 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16824 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16825 when you view the DVI.
16826 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16829 \begin_layout Standard
16830 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16832 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16833 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16838 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16839 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16841 \begin_inset space ~
16847 The latter option uses the program
16849 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16855 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16858 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16859 font access (see section
16860 \begin_inset space ~
16864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16866 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16871 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16872 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16879 \begin_inset Index idx
16882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16883 File formats ! PostScript
16891 \begin_layout Standard
16892 This file type has the extension
16893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16905 PostScript was developed by the company
16909 as a printer language.
16910 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16912 PostScript can be seen as a
16913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16916 programming language
16917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16920 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16925 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16932 \begin_inset Index idx
16935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16937 packages ! pstricks
16947 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16950 \begin_layout Standard
16951 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16955 Encapsulated PostScript
16956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16959 (EPS, file extension
16960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16972 As \SpecialChar LyX
16973 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16974 convert them in the background to EPS.
16975 If, for example, you have 50
16976 \begin_inset space ~
16979 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16981 \begin_inset space ~
16984 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16985 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16987 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16988 EPS to avoid this problem.
16991 \begin_layout Standard
16992 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16994 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16995 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17003 \begin_inset Index idx
17006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17013 \begin_inset Index idx
17016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17025 \begin_layout Standard
17026 This file type has the extension
17027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17043 Portable Document Format
17044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17051 was derived from PostScript.
17052 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17061 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17062 looks exactly the same.
17065 \begin_layout Standard
17066 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17070 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17074 (JPG, file extension
17075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17102 Portable Network Graphics
17103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17106 (PNG, file extension
17107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17119 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17120 converts them in the
17121 background to one of these formats.
17122 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17123 will slow down your workflow.
17124 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17127 \begin_layout Standard
17128 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17130 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17136 \begin_layout Description
17138 \begin_inset space ~
17141 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17145 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17148 \begin_layout Description
17150 \begin_inset space ~
17157 ) This uses the program
17159 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17162 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17165 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17168 is a new engine, derived from
17172 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17173 access (see section
17174 \begin_inset space ~
17178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17180 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17185 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17186 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17191 \begin_layout Description
17193 \begin_inset space ~
17200 ) This uses the program
17205 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17211 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17212 font access (see section
17213 \begin_inset space ~
17217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17219 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17224 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17225 vertically written Japanese.
17228 \begin_layout Description
17230 \begin_inset space ~
17233 (cropped) This is the same as
17236 \begin_inset space ~
17241 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17242 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17243 to generate good-looking
17244 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17247 \begin_layout Description
17249 \begin_inset space ~
17252 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17256 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17260 \begin_layout Description
17262 \begin_inset space ~
17265 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17269 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17270 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17274 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17275 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17278 \begin_layout Standard
17282 \begin_inset space ~
17291 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17292 works without problems.
17293 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17294 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17298 \begin_inset space ~
17306 \begin_inset space ~
17311 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17321 \begin_inset Index idx
17324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17325 FileFormats ! XHTML
17331 \begin_inset Index idx
17334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17343 \begin_layout Standard
17344 This file type has the extension
17345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17357 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17358 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17359 When \SpecialChar LyX
17360 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17361 suitable for the purpose.
17362 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17364 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17365 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17368 between different formats, which are described in section
17370 Math Output in XHTML
17375 \begin_inset space ~
17383 \begin_layout Standard
17384 XHTML output remains
17385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17392 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17393 features are supported yet.
17397 and the World Wide Web
17401 Additional Features
17403 manual, for more information.
17406 \begin_layout Standard
17407 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17409 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17410 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17416 \begin_layout Subsection
17418 \begin_inset Index idx
17421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17430 \begin_layout Standard
17431 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17432 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17441 or use the toolbar button
17448 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17449 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17450 \begin_inset space ~
17454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17456 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17460 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17462 \begin_inset space ~
17466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17468 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17473 Further output formats can be selected via
17475 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17476 View (Other Formats)
17478 or the toolbar button
17487 \begin_layout Standard
17488 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17489 viewer window using the menu
17491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17496 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17497 Update (Other Formats)
17502 \begin_layout Standard
17503 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17506 To have a real output, export your document.
17509 \begin_layout Section
17510 A few Words about Typography
17511 \begin_inset Index idx
17514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17523 \begin_layout Subsection
17524 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17525 \begin_inset Index idx
17528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17535 \begin_inset Index idx
17538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17547 \begin_layout Standard
17548 In \SpecialChar LyX
17550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17561 symbol comes in four variants: the
17578 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17584 \begin_layout Standard
17585 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17595 height_special "totalheight"
17600 backgroundcolor "none"
17603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17604 \begin_inset Tabular
17605 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17606 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17607 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17608 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17609 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17610 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17611 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17639 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17640 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17679 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17680 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17702 system key combination
17706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17707 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17719 and the em dash with
17722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17735 is the Mac label for the right
17746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17759 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17760 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17782 system key combination or
17783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17797 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17810 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17849 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17855 \begin_layout Standard
17856 Dashes can also be inserted with
17858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17860 \begin_inset space ~
17863 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17871 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17872 and 2014 for the en dash).
17875 \begin_layout Standard
17876 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17877 mode and has a length of its own.
17878 Here are some examples:
17881 \begin_layout Enumerate
17882 line- and page-breaks
17883 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17893 \begin_layout Enumerate
17895 \begin_inset space ~
17899 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17909 \begin_layout Enumerate
17910 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17911 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17921 \begin_layout Enumerate
17922 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17926 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17936 \begin_layout Standard
17938 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17940 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17941 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17949 \begin_layout Subsection
17950 Dashes and Line Breaks
17951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17953 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17960 \begin_layout Standard
17961 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17962 case and locale, e.
17963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17969 \begin_layout Itemize
17970 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17971 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17974 \begin_layout Itemize
17975 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17979 \begin_layout Itemize
17980 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17981 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17984 \begin_layout Standard
17985 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17986 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17997 allows line breaks after hyphens
17998 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18000 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18003 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18006 \begin_layout Enumerate
18007 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18008 \begin_inset space ~
18011 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18013 The Elements of Typographic Style
18016 \begin_inset space ~
18019 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18022 \begin_layout Enumerate
18023 Unwanted line breaks
18028 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18030 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18033 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18040 Prevent Hyphenation
18045 \begin_inset space ~
18061 in \SpecialChar TeX
18063 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18064 , a protected space does not suffice
18068 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18075 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18076 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18077 in the document language.
18078 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18092 \begin_layout Itemize
18094 \begin_inset space ~
18098 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18108 height_special "totalheight"
18113 backgroundcolor "none"
18116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18125 \begin_layout Itemize
18127 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18137 height_special "totalheight"
18142 backgroundcolor "none"
18145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18147 \begin_inset space ~
18155 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18156 \begin_inset space ~
18159 – sont très utiles.
18162 \begin_layout Itemize
18167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18176 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18180 \begin_layout Standard
18181 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18182 \begin_inset space ~
18185 – in contrast to an overfull line
18186 \begin_inset space ~
18189 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18193 \begin_layout Standard
18194 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18197 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18198 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18199 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18200 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18205 \begin_layout Enumerate
18206 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18207 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18208 or \SpecialChar TeX
18214 \begin_layout Itemize
18216 \begin_inset space ~
18219 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18220 \begin_inset space ~
18223 – sont très utiles.
18227 \begin_layout Enumerate
18228 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18229 \begin_inset Newline newline
18234 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18235 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18236 Optional line break
18242 \begin_layout Itemize
18243 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18244 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18245 should be followed by
18246 a line break opportunity.
18249 \begin_layout Standard
18250 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18251 \begin_inset space ~
18255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18257 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18268 \begin_layout Enumerate
18269 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18270 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18271 or en dashes (see section
18272 \begin_inset space ~
18276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18278 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18289 Changes and backwards compatibility
18292 \begin_layout Standard
18293 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18295 \begin_inset space ~
18298 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18299 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18308 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18309 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18317 \begin_layout Standard
18318 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18320 \begin_inset space ~
18323 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18325 prevents ligation to dashes.
18327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18334 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18339 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18340 after the input (unless the current text font is
18348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18349 The behavior was changed since
18350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18365 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18366 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18367 as non-breakable dashes.
18368 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18377 \begin_layout Standard
18380 \begin_inset space ~
18388 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18390 \begin_inset space ~
18393 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18396 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18397 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18398 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18399 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18401 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18405 If you used both literal and
18406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18413 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18415 \begin_inset space ~
18418 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18419 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18422 \begin_layout Subsection
18424 \begin_inset Index idx
18427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18436 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18443 \begin_layout Standard
18444 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18445 but automatically in the output.
18446 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18452 \begin_inset Index idx
18455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18462 following the rules of the document language.
18464 does not hyphenate text in the
18468 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18471 \begin_layout Standard
18473 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18477 font and with unusual constructs, like
18478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18486 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18487 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18488 This is done with the menu
18490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18491 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18493 \begin_inset space ~
18499 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18501 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18505 \begin_layout Standard
18506 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18507 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18518 would then see the hyphen
18519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18526 as a line break possibility.
18527 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18528 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18532 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18535 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18537 Prevent Hyphenation
18542 \begin_inset space ~
18550 \begin_layout Subsection
18552 \begin_inset Index idx
18555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18564 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18565 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18568 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18575 \begin_layout Standard
18576 When \SpecialChar LyX
18577 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18578 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18580 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18586 appropriate amount of space.
18587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18590 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18592 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18593 gets after another word.
18596 \begin_layout Standard
18597 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18598 not work in all cases.
18600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18611 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18612 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18615 \begin_layout Standard
18616 Here are some examples of
18620 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18623 \begin_layout Itemize
18628 \begin_layout Itemize
18633 \begin_layout Standard
18634 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18637 \begin_layout Itemize
18639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18643 this is too much space!
18646 \begin_layout Itemize
18651 \begin_layout Standard
18652 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18655 \begin_layout Standard
18656 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18659 \begin_layout Enumerate
18663 \begin_inset space ~
18668 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18669 \begin_inset space ~
18673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18675 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18680 \begin_inset Index idx
18683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18684 Spaces ! inter-word
18692 \begin_layout Enumerate
18696 \begin_inset space ~
18701 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18702 \begin_inset space ~
18706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18708 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18713 \begin_inset Index idx
18716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18725 \begin_layout Enumerate
18729 \begin_inset space ~
18733 \begin_inset space ~
18737 \begin_inset space ~
18744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18746 \begin_inset space ~
18751 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18752 This function is also bound to
18755 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18761 \begin_layout Standard
18762 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18765 \begin_layout Itemize
18767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18771 \begin_inset space \space{}
18774 this is too much space!
18777 \begin_layout Itemize
18778 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18782 \begin_layout Standard
18783 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18784 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18786 will take care of this.
18789 \begin_layout Standard
18790 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18794 \begin_inset space ~
18800 feature described in the section
18802 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18807 Additional Features
18812 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18814 \begin_inset Index idx
18817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 Typography ! Quotation marks
18824 \begin_inset Index idx
18827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18828 Quotation marks | see
18832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18858 \begin_layout Standard
18860 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18861 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18862 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18872 The keyboard character,
18876 , generates this automatically.
18879 \begin_layout Standard
18880 You can specify what character the
18884 key produces by using the submenu
18890 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18894 \begin_inset Index idx
18897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18898 Document ! Settings
18903 dialog and switching the
18907 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18908 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18910 \begin_inset space ~
18916 \begin_layout Labeling
18917 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18929 \begin_inset space ~
18933 \begin_inset space ~
18937 \begin_inset Quotes els
18941 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18955 \begin_inset Quotes els
18959 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18962 quotation marks (as common, e.
18963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18969 \begin_layout Labeling
18970 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18973 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18977 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18981 \begin_inset space ~
18985 \begin_inset space ~
18989 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18993 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18999 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19003 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19007 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19011 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19014 quotation marks (as common, e.
19015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19021 \begin_layout Labeling
19022 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19025 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19029 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19033 \begin_inset space ~
19037 \begin_inset space ~
19041 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19045 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19051 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19055 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19059 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19063 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19066 quotation marks (as common, e.
19067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19073 \begin_layout Labeling
19074 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19077 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19081 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19085 \begin_inset space ~
19089 \begin_inset space ~
19093 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19097 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19103 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19107 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19111 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19115 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19118 quotation marks (as common, e.
19119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19125 \begin_layout Labeling
19126 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19129 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19133 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19137 \begin_inset space ~
19141 \begin_inset space ~
19145 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19149 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19155 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19159 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19163 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19167 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19170 quotation marks (as common, e.
19171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19174 g., in Switzerland)
19177 \begin_layout Labeling
19178 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19181 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19185 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19189 \begin_inset space ~
19193 \begin_inset space ~
19197 \begin_inset Quotes als
19201 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19207 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19211 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19215 \begin_inset Quotes als
19219 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19222 quotation marks (as common, e.
19223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19229 \begin_layout Labeling
19230 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19233 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19237 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19241 \begin_inset space ~
19245 \begin_inset space ~
19249 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19253 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19259 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19263 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19267 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19271 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19274 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19277 \begin_layout Labeling
19278 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19281 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19285 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19289 \begin_inset space ~
19293 \begin_inset space ~
19297 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19301 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19307 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19311 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19315 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19319 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19322 quotation marks (as common, e.
19323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19326 g., in Great Britain)
19329 \begin_layout Labeling
19330 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19333 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19337 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19341 \begin_inset space ~
19345 \begin_inset space ~
19349 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19353 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19359 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19363 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19367 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19371 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19374 quotation marks (as common, e.
19375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19381 \begin_layout Labeling
19382 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19385 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19389 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19393 \begin_inset space ~
19397 \begin_inset space ~
19401 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19405 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19411 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19415 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19419 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19423 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19426 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19431 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19432 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19433 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19434 the inner marks differ).
19442 \begin_layout Labeling
19443 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19446 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19450 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19454 \begin_inset space ~
19458 \begin_inset space ~
19462 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19466 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19472 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19476 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19480 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19484 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19487 quotation marks (as common, e.
19488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19494 \begin_layout Labeling
19495 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19498 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19502 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19506 \begin_inset space ~
19510 \begin_inset space ~
19514 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19518 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19524 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19528 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19532 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19536 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19539 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19542 \begin_layout Labeling
19543 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19544 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19552 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19558 \begin_inset space ~
19562 \begin_inset space ~
19568 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19576 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19580 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19584 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19588 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19592 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19595 quotation marks (as common, e.
19596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19605 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19613 \begin_layout Labeling
19614 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19615 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19623 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19629 \begin_inset space ~
19633 \begin_inset space ~
19639 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19647 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19651 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19655 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19659 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19663 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19666 quotation marks (as common, e.
19667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19670 g., in North Korea and China)
19674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19675 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19676 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19684 \begin_layout Standard
19685 Inner quotation marks
19689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19690 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19691 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19692 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19700 does not necessarily mean
19701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19709 This is why we call them
19710 \begin_inset Quotes els
19714 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19730 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19732 \begin_inset Quotes els
19736 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19739 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19742 arg "quote-insert inner"
19747 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19753 \begin_layout Standard
19754 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19755 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19756 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19757 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19758 If you check the setting
19760 Use dynamic quotation marks
19764 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19765 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19768 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19769 they appear in a special color).
19770 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19771 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19776 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19779 \begin_layout Standard
19780 Individual quotation marks (i.
19781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19784 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19785 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19789 \begin_layout Subsection
19791 \begin_inset Index idx
19794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19795 Typography ! Ligatures
19801 \begin_inset Index idx
19804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19835 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19842 \begin_layout Standard
19843 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19844 print them as single characters.
19845 These groups are known as
19850 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19851 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19853 Here are the standard ligatures:
19856 \begin_layout Itemize
19860 \begin_layout Itemize
19864 \begin_layout Itemize
19868 \begin_layout Itemize
19872 \begin_layout Itemize
19876 \begin_layout Standard
19877 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19880 \begin_layout Standard
19881 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19882 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19890 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19906 To break a ligature, use
19908 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19909 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19911 \begin_inset space ~
19918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19929 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19946 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19954 \begin_layout Subsection
19956 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19958 \begin_inset Index idx
19961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19971 \begin_layout Standard
19974 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19975 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19979 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19982 \begin_layout Description
19984 The name of the game.
19987 \begin_layout Description
19989 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19993 \begin_layout Description
19995 The \SpecialChar TeX
19996 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20000 \begin_layout Description
20001 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20002 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20006 \begin_layout Standard
20007 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20013 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20021 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20022 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20023 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20024 converges to the number
20025 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20028 : The actual version is
20029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20037 , the previous one was
20038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20049 \begin_layout Subsection
20051 \begin_inset Index idx
20054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20063 \begin_layout Standard
20064 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20065 space between two words.
20066 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20076 for units use the menu
20078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20079 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20081 \begin_inset space ~
20089 arg "space-insert thin"
20095 \begin_layout Standard
20096 Here is an example to show the differences:
20099 \begin_layout Standard
20100 \begin_inset Tabular
20101 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20102 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20103 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20104 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20111 \begin_inset space ~
20115 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20127 space between number and unit
20134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20143 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20155 half space between number and unit
20168 \begin_layout Subsection
20170 \begin_inset Index idx
20173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20174 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20182 \begin_layout Standard
20183 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20185 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20186 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20187 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20188 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20189 These bits of text became known as
20200 \begin_layout Standard
20201 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20202 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20203 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20204 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20205 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20206 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20207 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20208 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20209 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20210 \begin_inset Newline newline
20218 \begin_inset Newline newline
20226 \begin_inset Newline newline
20229 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20230 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20231 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20233 \begin_inset space ~
20237 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20239 key "latexcompanion"
20245 \begin_inset space ~
20249 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20256 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20257 's page break mechanism.
20260 \begin_layout Chapter
20261 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20264 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20271 \begin_layout Standard
20272 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20275 \begin_inset space ~
20281 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20284 \begin_layout Section
20286 \begin_inset Index idx
20289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20305 \begin_layout Standard
20307 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20310 \begin_layout Description
20313 \begin_inset space ~
20316 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20317 \begin_inset Newline newline
20321 \begin_inset Note Note
20324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20325 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20333 \begin_layout Description
20334 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20335 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20336 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20339 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20340 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20342 \begin_inset space ~
20348 \begin_inset Newline newline
20352 \begin_inset Note Comment
20355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20356 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20365 \begin_layout Description
20367 \begin_inset space ~
20370 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20371 set in the document settings under
20373 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20375 \begin_inset space ~
20381 \begin_inset Newline newline
20385 \begin_inset Newline newline
20389 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20398 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20399 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20404 of a comment that appears in the output.
20410 \begin_inset Newline newline
20414 \begin_inset Newline newline
20417 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20420 \begin_layout Standard
20421 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20429 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20433 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20436 \begin_layout Section
20438 \begin_inset Index idx
20441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20450 name "sec:Footnotes"
20457 \begin_layout Standard
20459 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20462 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20465 or the toolbar button
20468 arg "footnote-insert"
20480 \begin_inset Graphics
20481 filename clipart/footnote.png
20490 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20491 's representation of your footnote.
20501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20520 label, the box will
20524 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20525 Clicking on the box label again will close
20538 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20539 and click on the footnote
20554 \begin_layout Standard
20555 Here is an example footnote:
20563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20564 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20572 \begin_layout Standard
20573 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20574 position where the footnote box is placed.
20575 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20576 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20577 according to the document class.
20579 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20580 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20586 ey are described in the
20589 \begin_inset space ~
20597 \begin_layout Section
20599 \begin_inset Index idx
20602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20611 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20618 \begin_layout Standard
20619 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20621 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20625 \begin_inset space ~
20630 or the toolbar button
20633 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20659 appearing within your text.
20660 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20661 's representation of your margin
20670 \begin_layout Standard
20671 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20675 \begin_inset Marginal
20678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20680 This is a marginal note.
20688 \begin_layout Standard
20689 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20690 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20691 pages, right on odd pages.
20694 \begin_layout Standard
20695 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20698 \begin_inset space ~
20706 \begin_inset space ~
20714 \begin_layout Section
20715 Graphics and Images
20716 \begin_inset Index idx
20719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20726 \begin_inset Index idx
20729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20738 name "sec:Graphics"
20745 \begin_layout Standard
20746 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20747 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20750 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20755 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20759 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20762 \begin_layout Standard
20763 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20768 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20769 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20771 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20772 \begin_inset space ~
20776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20778 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20785 \begin_layout Standard
20790 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20791 of the image in the output.
20792 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20796 \begin_inset space ~
20800 \begin_inset space ~
20809 \begin_inset space ~
20813 \begin_inset space ~
20817 \begin_inset space ~
20822 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20823 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20831 \begin_layout Standard
20835 \begin_inset space ~
20839 \begin_inset space ~
20844 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20845 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20847 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20852 \begin_inset space ~
20857 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20858 with the image size is printed.
20861 \begin_layout Standard
20862 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20863 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20865 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20868 \begin_layout Standard
20870 \begin_inset Graphics
20871 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20879 \begin_layout Standard
20880 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20881 the image into a float, see section
20882 \begin_inset space ~
20886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20888 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20895 \begin_layout Subsection
20897 \begin_inset Index idx
20900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20909 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20916 \begin_layout Standard
20917 You can insert images in any known file format.
20918 But as we explained in section
20919 \begin_inset space ~
20923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20925 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20929 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20931 therefore uses the program
20935 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20936 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20937 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20938 \begin_inset space ~
20942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20944 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20951 \begin_layout Standard
20952 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20955 \begin_layout Description
20957 \begin_inset space ~
20960 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20961 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20962 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20966 Graphics Interchange Format
20967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20970 (GIF, file extension
20971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20983 \begin_inset Index idx
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21018 Portable Network Graphics
21019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21022 (PNG, file extension
21023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21035 \begin_inset Index idx
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21070 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21074 (JPG, file extension
21075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21099 \begin_inset Index idx
21102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21133 \begin_layout Description
21135 \begin_inset space ~
21138 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21140 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21141 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21142 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21143 \begin_inset Newline newline
21146 Scalable image formats can be
21147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21150 Scalable Vector Graphics
21151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21154 (SVG, file extension
21155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21167 \begin_inset Index idx
21170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21202 Encapsulated PostScript
21203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21206 (EPS, file extension
21207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21219 \begin_inset Index idx
21222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21254 Portable Document Format
21255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21258 (PDF, file extension
21259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21271 \begin_inset Index idx
21274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21289 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21290 result will not be scalable.
21291 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21305 \begin_layout Standard
21306 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21313 \begin_layout Subsection
21314 Grouping of Image Settings
21315 \begin_inset Index idx
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21319 Images ! Settings grouping
21327 \begin_layout Standard
21328 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21330 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21331 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21333 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21334 need to manually change each of them.
21338 \begin_layout Standard
21339 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21342 \begin_inset space ~
21346 \begin_inset space ~
21358 \begin_inset space ~
21362 \begin_inset space ~
21368 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21369 and checking the name of the desired group.
21372 \begin_layout Section
21374 \begin_inset Index idx
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21393 \begin_layout Standard
21394 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21397 arg "tabular-insert"
21402 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21406 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21407 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21408 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21411 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21412 from the rest of the table.
21413 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21414 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21416 Here is an example table:
21419 \begin_layout Standard
21421 \begin_inset Tabular
21422 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21423 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21424 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21425 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21426 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21427 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21625 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21629 \begin_layout Standard
21631 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21632 This corresponds to the
21633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21640 table style listed in the style selection.
21643 \begin_layout Standard
21645 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21646 Other available styles include:
21649 \begin_layout Itemize
21651 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21660 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21664 \begin_layout Itemize
21666 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21667 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21670 \begin_layout Itemize
21672 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21681 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21682 bold top/bottom lines (see
21693 \begin_layout Standard
21695 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21696 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21697 button can be changed in
21699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21700 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21704 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21708 \begin_layout Subsection
21712 \begin_layout Standard
21713 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21716 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21720 This brings up the table dialog.
21721 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21722 cursor is placed currently.
21723 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21724 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21725 done on all of your selection.
21728 \begin_layout Standard
21729 In addition to the table dialog, the
21732 \begin_inset space ~
21737 helps you in setting table properties.
21738 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21741 \begin_layout Standard
21745 \begin_inset space ~
21750 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21751 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21752 current cell respectively.
21753 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21755 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21756 of text, see section
21757 \begin_inset space ~
21761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21763 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21770 \begin_layout Standard
21771 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21772 using the check box
21781 This will merge the cells to
21785 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21786 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21787 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21788 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21789 in the last row without the upper border:
21792 \begin_layout Standard
21794 \begin_inset Tabular
21795 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21796 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21797 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21798 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21799 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21800 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21811 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21820 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21896 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 \begin_layout Standard
21932 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21933 -arguments for the table.
21934 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21935 explained in the chapter
21942 \begin_inset space ~
21948 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21949 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21950 but are visible in the output.
21953 \begin_layout Standard
21954 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 Most DVI-viewers are
21966 able to display rotations.
21974 \begin_layout Standard
21979 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21984 adds lines for all cell borders.
21987 \begin_layout Subsection
21989 \begin_inset Index idx
21992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21993 Tables ! Multi-page
21999 \begin_inset Index idx
22002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22011 \begin_layout Standard
22012 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22015 \begin_inset space ~
22019 \begin_inset space ~
22027 \begin_inset space ~
22032 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22033 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22036 \begin_layout Description
22041 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22042 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22043 Except for the first page, if
22046 \begin_inset space ~
22054 \begin_layout Description
22058 \begin_inset space ~
22063 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22064 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22067 \begin_layout Description
22072 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22073 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22074 except for the last page, if
22077 \begin_inset space ~
22085 \begin_layout Description
22089 \begin_inset space ~
22094 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22095 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22098 \begin_layout Description
22099 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22100 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22102 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22106 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22109 \begin_inset space ~
22117 \begin_layout Standard
22118 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22119 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22120 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22126 In this context, first means first in this order:
22129 \begin_inset space ~
22141 \begin_inset space ~
22146 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22149 \begin_layout Standard
22151 \begin_inset Tabular
22152 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22153 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22154 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22155 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22156 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22157 <row endfirsthead="true">
22158 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22164 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22169 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22178 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22188 <row endfirsthead="true">
22189 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22209 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 <row endhead="true">
22222 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22233 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22242 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 <row endhead="true">
22253 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22264 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22273 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22285 <row endfoot="true">
22286 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22297 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22306 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22337 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23278 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23287 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23307 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23338 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23369 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23400 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23431 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23462 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23493 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23524 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23555 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23586 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23617 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23648 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23679 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23710 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23741 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23772 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23803 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23834 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23865 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23896 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23927 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23958 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24020 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24113 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24144 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24175 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24206 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24237 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <row endlastfoot="true">
24268 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24279 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24288 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24305 \begin_layout Subsection
24307 \begin_inset Index idx
24310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24319 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24326 \begin_layout Standard
24327 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24328 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24329 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24330 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24334 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24337 \begin_layout Standard
24338 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24339 for the column in the table dialog.
24340 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24341 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24345 \begin_layout Standard
24347 \begin_inset Tabular
24348 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24349 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24350 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24351 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24352 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24372 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24441 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24497 This is longer now.
24502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24553 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24554 This is longer now.
24559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24585 \begin_layout Standard
24586 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24587 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24592 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24593 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24599 Selection with the mouse or with
24603 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24604 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24605 the selection from outside the table.
24608 \begin_layout Section
24610 \begin_inset Index idx
24613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24629 \begin_layout Subsection
24633 \begin_layout Standard
24634 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24635 have a fixed location.
24637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24644 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24652 \begin_inset space ~
24657 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24658 too many notes on the current page.
24661 \begin_layout Standard
24662 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24663 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24664 and pages without text.
24665 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24666 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24667 Floats are therefore numbered.
24668 Referencing is described in section
24669 \begin_inset space ~
24673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24675 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24682 \begin_layout Standard
24683 To insert a float, use the menu
24685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24689 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24690 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24692 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24693 \begin_inset Index idx
24696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24702 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24703 paragraph within the float.
24704 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24705 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24706 left-clicking on the box label.
24707 A closed float box looks like this:
24708 \begin_inset Graphics
24709 filename clipart/float.png
24714 – a gray button with a red label.
24717 \begin_layout Standard
24718 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24720 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24723 \begin_layout Subsection
24725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24727 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24732 \begin_inset Index idx
24735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24736 Floats ! Figure floats
24744 \begin_layout Standard
24746 \begin_inset space ~
24750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24752 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24756 was created using the menu
24758 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24759 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24765 arg "float-insert figure"
24769 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24778 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24782 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24783 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24785 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24787 \begin_inset space ~
24795 arg "layout-paragraph"
24801 \begin_layout Standard
24802 \begin_inset Float figure
24809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24811 \begin_inset Graphics
24812 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24822 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24827 name "fig:A-star-in"
24844 \begin_layout Standard
24845 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24846 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24848 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24857 ) and refer to it using the menu
24859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24865 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24869 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24870 vague references like
24871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24878 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24879 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24889 For more about cross-references, see section
24890 \begin_inset space ~
24894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24896 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24903 \begin_layout Standard
24904 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24905 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24906 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24907 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24908 as described in section
24909 \begin_inset space ~
24913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24915 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24921 \begin_inset space ~
24925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24927 reference "fig:Two-images"
24931 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24932 You can also set the images one below the other.
24934 \begin_inset space ~
24938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24940 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24947 reference "fig:Star"
24951 are the subfigures.
24954 \begin_layout Standard
24955 \begin_inset Float figure
24962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24963 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24967 \begin_inset Float figure
24974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24975 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24980 name "fig:Undefinable"
24992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24993 \begin_inset Graphics
24994 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25006 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25010 \begin_inset Float figure
25017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25018 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25036 \begin_inset Graphics
25037 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25049 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25056 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25061 name "fig:Two-images"
25078 \begin_layout Subsection
25080 \begin_inset Index idx
25083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25084 Floats ! Table floats
25092 \begin_layout Standard
25093 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25096 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25099 or the toolbar button
25102 arg "float-insert table"
25106 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25107 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25108 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25110 \begin_inset space ~
25114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25116 reference "tab:Table-float"
25123 \begin_layout Standard
25124 \begin_inset Float table
25131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25132 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25137 name "tab:Table-float"
25149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25151 \begin_inset Tabular
25152 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25153 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25155 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25156 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25283 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25304 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25307 \end{array}\right]$
25315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25328 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25349 \begin_layout Subsection
25351 \begin_inset Index idx
25354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25363 \begin_layout Standard
25365 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25366 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25367 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25369 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25377 \begin_inset space ~
25385 \begin_layout Section
25387 \begin_inset Index idx
25390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25399 \begin_layout Standard
25401 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25403 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25404 \begin_inset space \space{}
25411 \begin_layout Standard
25412 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25413 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25419 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25420 and its alignment within the page.
25423 \begin_layout Standard
25425 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25435 height_special "totalheight"
25440 backgroundcolor "none"
25443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25446 This is a minipage.
25447 The text is set in an italic style.
25450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25453 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25454 another formatting.
25462 \begin_layout Standard
25463 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25466 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25470 as described in section
25471 \begin_inset space ~
25475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25477 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25482 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25488 \begin_layout Standard
25489 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25499 height_special "totalheight"
25504 backgroundcolor "none"
25507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25508 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25509 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25515 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25519 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25529 height_special "totalheight"
25534 backgroundcolor "none"
25537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25538 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25539 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25547 \begin_layout Standard
25548 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25554 \begin_layout Standard
25555 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25557 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25564 \begin_inset space ~
25572 \begin_layout Chapter
25573 Mathematical Formulas
25574 \begin_inset Index idx
25577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25584 \begin_inset Index idx
25587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25618 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25625 \begin_layout Standard
25626 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25631 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25634 \begin_layout Section
25636 \begin_inset Index idx
25639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25648 \begin_layout Standard
25649 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25662 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25664 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25665 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25666 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25674 \begin_layout Standard
25675 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25679 \begin_inset space ~
25684 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25687 \begin_layout Standard
25688 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25689 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25692 \begin_layout Standard
25693 This is a line with an inline formula
25694 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25700 \begin_layout Standard
25701 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25702 paragraph, like this one:
25703 \begin_inset Formula
25710 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25713 \begin_layout Standard
25715 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25717 For example, typing
25718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25731 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25732 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25736 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25739 \begin_inset space ~
25747 \begin_layout Subsection
25748 Navigating in Formulas
25749 \begin_inset Index idx
25752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25761 \begin_layout Standard
25762 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25763 achieved with the arrow keys.
25765 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25766 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25771 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25772 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25776 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25780 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25783 \end{array}\right]$
25791 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25796 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25797 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25800 \begin_layout Standard
25805 , printed in this document as
25806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25810 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25817 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25818 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25819 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25824 For example, if you want
25825 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25833 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25843 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25847 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25852 , since in the latter case only the
25855 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25860 will be under the square root sign:
25861 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25867 \begin_layout Standard
25868 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25870 \begin_inset Formula
25872 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25881 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25882 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25885 \begin_layout Subsection
25889 \begin_layout Standard
25890 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25891 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25895 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25896 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25897 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25898 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25899 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25903 \begin_layout Subsection
25904 Exponents and Subscripts
25905 \begin_inset Index idx
25908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25915 \begin_inset Index idx
25918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25927 \begin_layout Standard
25928 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25931 arg "math-superscript"
25937 arg "math-subscript"
25940 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25942 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25945 , type in a formula
25948 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25958 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25964 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25968 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25974 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25980 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25989 , you have to use an extra
25993 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25994 For example, if you want
25995 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26001 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26007 Subscripts are similar: To get
26008 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26014 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26022 \begin_layout Subsection
26024 \begin_inset Index idx
26027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26036 \begin_layout Standard
26037 Create a fraction either with the command
26043 or by using the icon
26046 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26052 \begin_inset space ~
26058 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26059 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26060 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26065 To move back up, press
26070 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26071 \begin_inset Formula
26073 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26076 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26084 \begin_layout Subsection
26086 \begin_inset Index idx
26089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26098 \begin_layout Standard
26099 Roots can be created using the
26102 \begin_inset space ~
26110 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26116 arg "math-insert \\root"
26138 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26144 always produces a square root.
26147 \begin_layout Subsection
26148 Operators with Limits
26149 \begin_inset Index idx
26152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26159 \begin_inset Index idx
26162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26171 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26178 \begin_layout Standard
26180 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26184 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26187 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26188 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26189 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26190 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26191 The sum operator will automatically place its
26192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26199 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26201 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26205 \begin_inset Formula
26207 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26212 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26216 \begin_layout Standard
26217 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26219 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26220 behind the operator and using the menu
26222 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26223 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26225 \begin_inset space ~
26229 \begin_inset space ~
26243 \begin_layout Standard
26244 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26253 \begin_inset Index idx
26256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26263 \begin_inset Formula
26265 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26270 which will place the
26271 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26283 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26284 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26290 \begin_layout Standard
26291 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26298 Have a look at section
26299 \begin_inset space ~
26303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26305 reference "subsec:Functions"
26309 for an explanation of function macros.
26312 \begin_layout Subsection
26314 \begin_inset Index idx
26317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26326 \begin_layout Standard
26327 Most math symbols can be found in the
26330 \begin_inset space ~
26335 under one of several categories; including
26352 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26356 \begin_layout Standard
26357 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26358 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26359 don't have to use the
26362 \begin_inset space ~
26367 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26369 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26372 \begin_layout Subsection
26374 \begin_inset Index idx
26377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26386 \begin_layout Standard
26387 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26393 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26399 \begin_inset space ~
26407 arg "math-insert \\space"
26411 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26412 For example, the sequence
26417 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26420 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26422 \begin_inset Graphics
26423 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26428 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26429 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26430 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26431 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26432 , because they are negative
26434 Here are two examples:
26437 \begin_layout Standard
26447 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26453 \begin_layout Standard
26463 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26469 \begin_layout Subsection
26471 \begin_inset Index idx
26474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26483 name "subsec:Functions"
26490 \begin_layout Standard
26494 \begin_inset space ~
26499 contains under the button
26502 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26505 a number of function macros, such as
26506 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26510 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26518 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26525 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26526 avoid confusions, because
26527 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26531 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26537 \begin_layout Standard
26538 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26540 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26544 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26550 \begin_layout Standard
26551 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26552 are placed, as described in section
26553 \begin_inset space ~
26557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26559 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26566 \begin_layout Subsection
26568 \begin_inset Index idx
26571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26580 \begin_layout Standard
26581 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26583 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26584 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26585 commands, for example, to enter
26586 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26589 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26590 Our example is entered by typing
26595 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26602 \begin_inset space ~
26606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26608 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26612 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26615 \begin_layout Standard
26616 \begin_inset Float table
26623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26624 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26629 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26633 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26643 \begin_inset Tabular
26644 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26645 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26646 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26647 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26648 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26732 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26786 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26840 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26894 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26948 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27002 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27056 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27110 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27164 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27209 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27230 \begin_layout Standard
27231 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27234 \begin_inset space ~
27242 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27245 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27249 \begin_layout Section
27250 Brackets and Delimiters
27251 \begin_inset Index idx
27254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27261 \begin_inset Index idx
27264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27273 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27280 \begin_layout Standard
27281 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27283 For some purposes, using just the keys
27288 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27289 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27290 toolbar delimiter icon
27293 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27297 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27298 \begin_inset Formula
27300 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27308 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27309 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27313 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27316 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27322 \begin_inset Formula
27324 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27332 \begin_layout Standard
27333 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27334 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27338 \begin_layout Standard
27339 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27340 left side and right side.
27341 If you use the option
27344 \begin_inset space ~
27349 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27350 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27352 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27357 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27358 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27361 \begin_layout Standard
27362 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27363 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27364 is to go inside the brackets.
27365 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27370 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27371 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27372 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27376 arg "math-delim ( )"
27382 \begin_layout Section
27383 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27384 \begin_inset Index idx
27387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27394 \begin_inset Index idx
27397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27404 \begin_inset Index idx
27407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27408 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27416 \begin_layout Standard
27417 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27421 \begin_inset space ~
27429 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27433 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27434 Here is an example:
27435 \begin_inset Formula
27437 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27446 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27447 \begin_inset space ~
27451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27453 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27458 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27459 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27460 This alignment is set in the box
27465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27514 for every column as default.
27515 For example, the sequence
27516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27527 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27528 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27529 corresponds to the relevant column.
27530 The result will look like this:
27531 \begin_inset Formula
27534 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27535 column & has & has\,right\\
27536 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27545 \begin_layout Standard
27546 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27549 arg "newline-insert newline"
27552 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27553 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27555 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27558 or the math toolbar.
27561 \begin_layout Standard
27562 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27563 It can be created with the menu
27565 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27566 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27568 \begin_inset space ~
27580 Here is an example:
27581 \begin_inset Formula
27595 \begin_layout Standard
27596 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27599 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27602 arg "newline-insert newline"
27606 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27611 arg "newline-insert newline"
27614 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27622 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27623 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27624 A new row is created by every further entry of
27627 arg "newline-insert newline"
27631 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27632 Here is an example:
27633 \begin_inset Formula
27635 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27636 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27641 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27642 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27643 \begin_inset Formula
27645 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27653 \begin_layout Standard
27654 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27661 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27662 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27665 reference "eq:asquared"
27670 The other types are described in section
27671 \begin_inset space ~
27675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27677 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27684 \begin_layout Section
27685 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27686 \begin_inset Index idx
27689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27690 Math ! Formula numbering
27696 \begin_inset Index idx
27699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27700 Math ! Referencing formulas
27706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27708 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27715 \begin_layout Standard
27716 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27718 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27719 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27721 \begin_inset space ~
27725 \begin_inset space ~
27733 arg "math-number-toggle"
27737 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27738 within parentheses.
27739 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27740 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27741 the document class.
27742 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27743 separated by a dot:
27744 \begin_inset Formula
27754 arg "math-number-toggle"
27757 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27758 You can only number displayed formulas.
27761 \begin_layout Standard
27762 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27764 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27765 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27767 \begin_inset space ~
27771 \begin_inset space ~
27779 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27782 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27783 \begin_inset Formula
27786 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27792 To number all lines use the shortcut
27795 arg "math-number-toggle"
27801 \begin_layout Standard
27802 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27805 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27806 A label is inserted with the menu
27808 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27817 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27818 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27819 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27831 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27832 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27833 We inserted in the following example the label
27834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27841 in the second line:
27842 \begin_inset Formula
27844 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27845 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27850 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27851 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27852 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27856 \begin_inset space ~
27864 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27868 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27869 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27870 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27871 as the formula number:
27874 \begin_layout Standard
27875 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27878 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27885 \begin_layout Standard
27886 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27887 's cross-reference box are described in section
27888 \begin_inset space ~
27892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27894 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27899 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27907 \begin_layout Section
27908 User defined math macros
27909 \begin_inset Index idx
27912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27921 \begin_layout Standard
27923 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27924 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27925 Math macros are explained in section
27928 \begin_inset space ~
27940 \begin_layout Section
27944 \begin_layout Subsection
27946 \begin_inset Index idx
27949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27958 \begin_layout Standard
27959 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27960 To set a font in a formula, use the
27963 \begin_inset space ~
27971 arg "math-insert \\font"
27974 , or enter its command, listed in table
27975 \begin_inset space ~
27979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27981 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27988 \begin_layout Standard
27989 \begin_inset Float table
27996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27997 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28000 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28002 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28006 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28016 \begin_inset Tabular
28017 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
28018 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28019 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28020 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28052 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28079 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28106 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28139 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28166 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28193 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28227 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28254 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28288 \begin_layout Standard
28289 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28297 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28313 \begin_layout Standard
28314 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28315 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28320 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28321 space when you need a space in the box.
28322 Here is an example where
28323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28334 denotes the set of numbers:
28335 \begin_inset Formula
28337 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28345 \begin_layout Standard
28346 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28347 You can, for example, put a character in
28356 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28360 \begin_inset Newline newline
28363 So it is better not to use this feature.
28366 \begin_layout Standard
28367 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28368 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28372 \begin_inset Newline newline
28375 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28381 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28382 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28388 \begin_layout Standard
28395 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28398 \begin_layout Standard
28399 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28401 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28402 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28404 \begin_inset space ~
28412 \begin_layout Subsection
28414 \begin_inset Index idx
28417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28426 \begin_layout Standard
28427 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28429 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28433 \begin_inset space ~
28437 \begin_inset space ~
28445 \begin_inset space ~
28453 arg "math-insert \\font"
28457 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28458 in black instead of blue.
28459 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28460 Here is an example:
28461 \begin_inset Formula
28464 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28465 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28474 \begin_layout Subsection
28476 \begin_inset Index idx
28479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28488 \begin_layout Standard
28489 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28490 automatically chosen in most situations.
28508 For most characters,
28516 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28517 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28522 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28523 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28524 thinks are appropriate.
28525 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28528 arg "math-insert \\style"
28532 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28533 For example, you can set
28534 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28537 , which is normally in
28546 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28550 The four styles are used in the following example:
28553 \begin_layout Standard
28554 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28558 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28562 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28566 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28572 \begin_layout Standard
28573 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28574 is set in a particular size with the menu
28576 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28578 \begin_inset space ~
28583 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28584 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28585 will be adjusted to correspond.
28586 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28597 \begin_layout Standard
28601 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28607 \begin_layout Section
28608 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28610 \begin_inset Index idx
28613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28620 \begin_inset Index idx
28623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28632 \begin_layout Standard
28634 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28635 that are in common use.
28638 \begin_layout Subsection
28639 Enabling AMS-Support
28642 \begin_layout Standard
28643 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28644 the document by selecting the checkbox
28647 \begin_inset space ~
28651 \begin_inset space ~
28655 \begin_inset space ~
28662 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28666 \begin_inset Index idx
28669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28670 Document ! Settings
28678 \begin_inset space ~
28684 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28685 -errors in formulas,
28686 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28689 \begin_layout Subsection
28691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28693 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28698 \begin_inset Index idx
28701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28702 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28710 \begin_layout Standard
28711 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28712 provides a selection of different formula types.
28714 allows you to choose between
28735 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28736 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28743 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28746 \begin_layout Chapter
28750 \begin_layout Section
28752 \begin_inset Index idx
28755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28764 name "sec:Cross-References"
28771 \begin_layout Standard
28772 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28773 's strengths is cross-references.
28774 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28776 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28777 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28778 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28781 \begin_layout Enumerate
28785 \begin_layout Enumerate
28786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28788 name "enu:Second-item"
28795 \begin_layout Enumerate
28799 \begin_layout Standard
28800 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28802 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28805 or by pressing the toolbar button
28812 A gray label box like this:
28813 \begin_inset Graphics
28814 filename clipart/label.png
28818 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28820 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28855 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28856 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28872 \begin_layout Standard
28873 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28875 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28878 or the toolbar button
28881 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28885 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28886 \begin_inset Graphics
28887 filename clipart/reference.png
28891 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28893 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28906 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28910 \begin_layout Standard
28911 As an alternative to
28913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28916 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28921 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28922 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28924 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28936 \begin_layout Standard
28937 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28938 \begin_inset space ~
28942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28944 reference "enu:Second-item"
28951 \begin_layout Standard
28952 It is recommended to use a protected space
28956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28957 described in section
28958 \begin_inset space ~
28962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28964 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28973 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28974 line breaks between them.
28977 \begin_layout Standard
28978 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28981 \begin_layout Description
28982 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28985 reference "fig:Two-images"
28992 \begin_layout Description
28993 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28994 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29006 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29013 \begin_layout Description
29014 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29015 \begin_inset space ~
29019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29020 LatexCommand pageref
29021 reference "fig:Two-images"
29028 \begin_layout Description
29030 \begin_inset space ~
29034 \begin_inset space ~
29037 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29039 LatexCommand vpageref
29040 reference "fig:Two-images"
29045 \begin_inset Newline newline
29048 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29049 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29050 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29051 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29052 it prints “on the next page”.
29053 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29056 \begin_layout Description
29058 \begin_inset space ~
29062 \begin_inset space ~
29066 \begin_inset space ~
29069 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29072 reference "fig:Two-images"
29077 \begin_inset Newline newline
29080 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29086 ; otherwise it behaves like
29090 \begin_inset space ~
29094 \begin_inset space ~
29103 \begin_layout Description
29105 \begin_inset space ~
29108 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29109 \begin_inset Newline newline
29113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29121 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29131 \begin_inset Index idx
29134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29136 packages ! prettyref
29142 \begin_inset Index idx
29145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29147 packages ! refstyle
29158 \begin_inset Newline newline
29161 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29162 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29165 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29169 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29170 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29178 is the default and preferred because
29182 supports only English documents.
29183 The format is specified by using the command
29195 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29196 preamble of the document.
29197 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29215 \begin_inset Newline newline
29222 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29227 \begin_inset Newline newline
29238 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29239 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29241 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29242 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29247 , you might do so as follows:
29248 \begin_inset Newline newline
29255 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29260 \begin_inset Newline newline
29263 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29264 the package documentation
29265 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29267 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29273 \begin_inset Newline newline
29284 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29291 \begin_layout Description
29293 \begin_inset space ~
29296 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29298 LatexCommand nameref
29299 reference "fig:Two-images"
29306 \begin_layout Description
29308 \begin_inset space ~
29311 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29312 label for the reference:
29313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29314 LatexCommand labelonly
29315 reference "fig:Two-images"
29320 \begin_inset Newline newline
29323 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29324 Code, if you want to issue a command
29325 that \SpecialChar LyX
29331 , then you may want to use the
29334 \begin_inset space ~
29339 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29349 This is the form needed for e.
29350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29354 \begin_inset space \space{}
29361 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29362 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29364 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29368 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29372 \begin_layout Standard
29373 You can only use the style
29377 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29381 is always possible.
29384 \begin_layout Standard
29385 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29386 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29388 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29389 \begin_inset space ~
29393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29395 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29402 \begin_layout Standard
29403 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29407 \begin_inset space ~
29411 \begin_inset space ~
29416 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29417 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29420 \begin_inset space ~
29425 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29426 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29429 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29435 \begin_layout Standard
29436 You can change labels at any time.
29437 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29438 do not need to think about this.
29441 \begin_layout Standard
29442 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29444 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29448 \begin_layout Standard
29449 References are described in detail in the section
29450 \begin_inset space ~
29460 \begin_inset space ~
29468 \begin_layout Section
29469 Table of Contents and other Listings
29470 \begin_inset Index idx
29473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29480 \begin_inset Index idx
29483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29484 Navigating ! Outline
29490 \begin_inset Index idx
29493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29509 \begin_layout Subsection
29511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29513 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29520 \begin_layout Standard
29521 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29524 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29526 \begin_inset space ~
29530 \begin_inset space ~
29536 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29538 If you click on it, the
29542 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29543 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29544 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29546 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29548 \begin_inset space ~
29553 that is described in section
29554 \begin_inset space ~
29558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29560 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29567 \begin_layout Standard
29568 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29569 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29571 \begin_inset space ~
29575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29577 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29581 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29583 \begin_inset space ~
29587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29589 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29593 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29595 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29598 \begin_layout Subsection
29599 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29602 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29609 \begin_layout Standard
29610 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29612 You can insert them via the
29614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29615 List/Contents/References
29618 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29621 \begin_layout Section
29622 URLs and Hyperlinks
29623 \begin_inset Index idx
29626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29633 \begin_inset Index idx
29636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29645 \begin_layout Subsection
29647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29656 \begin_layout Standard
29657 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29665 \begin_layout Standard
29666 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29668 \begin_inset Flex URL
29671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29673 https://www.lyx.org
29681 \begin_layout Standard
29682 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29688 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29692 \begin_layout Standard
29693 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29701 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29710 \begin_layout Subsection
29712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29714 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29721 \begin_layout Standard
29722 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29724 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29727 or with the toolbar button
29734 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29743 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29744 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29745 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29747 name "LyX's homepage"
29748 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29753 , an Email address like this:
29754 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29756 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29757 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29763 , or a link to a file.
29768 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29776 \begin_layout Standard
29777 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29790 to the link target.
29793 \begin_layout Standard
29794 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29795 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29796 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29797 the text style dialog.
29798 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29802 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29804 name "LyX's homepage"
29805 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29813 \begin_layout Standard
29814 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29818 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29820 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29821 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29825 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29827 \begin_inset Newline newline
29835 \begin_inset Newline newline
29842 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29845 \begin_layout Section
29847 \begin_inset Index idx
29850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29859 name "sec:Appendices"
29866 \begin_layout Standard
29867 Appendices are created with the menu
29869 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29871 \begin_inset space ~
29875 \begin_inset space ~
29881 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29882 as the appendix part of the book.
29883 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29886 \begin_layout Standard
29887 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29888 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29889 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29890 and the subsection number.
29891 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29895 \begin_layout Standard
29897 \begin_inset space ~
29901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29903 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
29911 \begin_inset space ~
29915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29917 reference "subsec:Export"
29924 \begin_layout Section
29926 \begin_inset Index idx
29929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29938 name "sec:Bibliography"
29945 \begin_layout Standard
29946 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29948 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29949 \begin_inset space ~
29953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29955 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29962 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29967 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29968 \begin_inset space ~
29972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29974 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29979 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29980 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29981 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29985 using a bibliography database.
29988 \begin_layout Standard
29989 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29990 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29994 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29995 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29996 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29997 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29998 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30001 \begin_layout Subsection
30002 The Bibliography Environment
30003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30005 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30012 \begin_layout Standard
30017 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30019 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30028 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30030 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30031 of ASCII characters only.
30035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30037 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30040 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30046 \begin_inset Newline newline
30050 \begin_inset Flex URL
30053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30055 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30065 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30075 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30076 \begin_inset Newline newline
30083 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30084 the number of the entry.
30089 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30098 \begin_layout Standard
30099 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30104 or the toolbar button
30107 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30111 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30112 containing the available citations.
30113 Select one or more keys from the list and
30123 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30124 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30128 \begin_layout Standard
30129 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30130 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30131 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30143 \begin_layout Standard
30147 Companion Second Edition
30150 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30152 key "latexcompanion"
30160 \begin_layout Standard
30161 The \SpecialChar LyX
30162 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30163 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30173 \begin_layout Standard
30174 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30181 \begin_inset Index idx
30184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30193 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30194 the label needs to be given the form
30195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30206 Author A and Author B(Year)
30207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30214 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30221 \begin_inset space ~
30226 in the document settings
30227 \begin_inset Index idx
30230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30231 Document ! Settings
30238 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30240 \begin_inset space ~
30246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30248 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30256 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30258 Once you have done that, the
30262 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30279 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30280 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30281 These two are madatory.
30282 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30285 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30287 ) and in abrreviated form (
30294 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30295 add the abbreviated form to
30299 and the full list to the optional
30307 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30308 If specified like this,
30310 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30311 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30314 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30321 is specified, toggling
30322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30329 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30330 full and abbreviated list
30334 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30335 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30336 the citation references.
30337 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30342 \begin_layout Standard
30343 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30346 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30348 \begin_inset space ~
30356 arg "layout-paragraph"
30360 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30363 \begin_layout Subsection
30364 Bibliography databases
30365 \begin_inset Index idx
30368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30369 Bibliography ! Databases
30375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30377 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30384 \begin_layout Standard
30385 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30391 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30393 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30394 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30399 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30401 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30402 your working field in a database.
30403 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30404 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30405 list for that document.
30406 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30410 \begin_layout Standard
30411 The database is a text file with the file extension
30412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30423 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30424 The format is explained in
30425 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30432 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30434 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30436 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30442 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30443 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30444 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30446 \begin_inset Flex URL
30449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30451 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30459 \begin_layout Standard
30461 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30462 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30463 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30465 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30467 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30468 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30469 Those are addressed by
30474 \begin_inset Index idx
30477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30479 packages ! biblatex
30485 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30486 (although it has been significantly
30487 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30497 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30498 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30499 might conversely fail to correctly
30500 handle databases that use specific
30509 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30513 \begin_layout Standard
30514 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30519 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30525 \begin_inset Index idx
30528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30529 Document ! Settings
30541 \begin_inset space ~
30546 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30554 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30555 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30557 \begin_inset Index idx
30560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30561 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30570 \begin_layout Standard
30571 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30574 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30575 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30577 \begin_inset space ~
30583 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30584 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30592 Add bibliography to TOC
30594 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30599 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30600 in the document or just the cited references.
30602 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30607 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30608 differ from the encoding of the document.
30613 \begin_layout Standard
30614 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30615 style file is a text file with the file extension
30616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30627 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30628 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30629 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30630 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30632 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30638 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30639 \begin_inset Newline newline
30643 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30645 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30655 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30660 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30664 \begin_layout Standard
30665 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30670 \begin_inset Index idx
30673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30674 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30680 \begin_inset Index idx
30683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30685 packages ! biblatex
30693 \begin_layout Standard
30694 Accessing a database via
30698 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30702 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30704 \begin_inset space ~
30710 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30711 you cannot select a
30716 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30720 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30723 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30724 As for the styles, note the following.
30729 \begin_layout Standard
30734 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30747 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30748 file (text file with the file extension
30749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30760 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30761 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30763 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30767 \begin_layout Standard
30772 styles are not set in the
30775 \begin_inset space ~
30780 dialog, but in the document settings.
30781 \begin_inset Index idx
30784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30785 Document ! Settings
30790 However, in the dialog in the
30794 field, which is only visible if you use
30798 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30799 example how its heading will appear).
30800 These options are described in detail in the
30805 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30815 \begin_layout Standard
30816 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30817 \begin_inset space ~
30821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30823 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30833 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30834 Bibliography Processors
30837 \begin_layout Standard
30838 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30839 uses a bibliography processor,
30840 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30841 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30842 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30844 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30845 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30848 \begin_layout Standard
30849 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30851 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30852 You can do this on a general level in
30854 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30855 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30856 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30859 or for individual documents in
30861 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30862 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30866 The following variants are available by default:
30869 \begin_layout Description
30870 biber a specific, modern processor
30871 \begin_inset Index idx
30874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30881 developed exclusively for
30885 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30891 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30896 makes use of; if you use the
30900 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30907 \begin_layout Description
30908 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30909 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30910 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30914 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30917 \begin_layout Description
30918 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30919 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30923 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30927 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30931 features are supported.
30934 \begin_layout Standard
30935 By default (with the
30941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30942 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30955 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30956 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30957 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30960 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30961 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30974 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30975 -based bibliography styles).
30976 This should suit most needs.
30979 \begin_layout Standard
30980 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30981 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30982 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30987 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30988 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30989 You can adjust it in
30991 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30992 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30993 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30999 \begin_layout Standard
31000 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31001 can add below the selection.
31002 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31003 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31009 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31023 \begin_layout Standard
31025 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31027 These are explained in detail in section
31029 Customizing Bibliographies
31033 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31038 Additional Features
31043 \begin_layout Subsection
31045 \begin_inset Index idx
31048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31049 Bibliography ! Citation format
31055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31057 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31064 \begin_layout Standard
31065 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31070 \begin_inset space \space{}
31073 numerical citation (as
31074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31081 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31089 ) or author-year citations (as
31090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31099 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31103 \begin_layout Standard
31104 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31108 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31112 \begin_inset Index idx
31115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31116 Document ! Settings
31121 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31127 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31128 labels, is there to use
31131 \begin_inset space ~
31142 \begin_inset space ~
31147 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31150 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31157 \begin_layout Standard
31158 With a bibliography database (see
31159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31161 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31168 ) one has in contrary to the
31172 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31173 These style formats are available:
31176 \begin_layout Description
31178 \begin_inset space ~
31181 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31182 -based approached without any additional packages
31183 (simple numeric citations).
31186 \begin_layout Description
31187 Biblatex loads the package
31192 \begin_inset Index idx
31195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31197 packages ! biblatex
31202 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31204 Biblatex citation style
31208 Biblatex bibliography style
31211 Options to the package
31215 can be entered in the
31222 \begin_layout Description
31224 \begin_inset space ~
31228 \begin_inset space ~
31231 mode) loads the package
31235 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31236 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31248 behavior very closely.
31253 this option has some additional styles.
31258 styles are also supported by this variant.
31261 \begin_layout Description
31263 \begin_inset space ~
31266 (BibTeX) loads the package
31271 \begin_inset Index idx
31274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31281 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31284 \begin_layout Description
31286 \begin_inset space ~
31289 (BibTeX) loads the package
31294 \begin_inset Index idx
31297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31304 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31307 \begin_layout Standard
31316 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31318 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31327 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31329 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31330 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31332 Biblatex citation style
31335 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31341 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31345 \begin_layout Standard
31346 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31347 are available in the
31352 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31353 a name prefix such as
31354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31369 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31374 \begin_inset space \space{}
31378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31389 \begin_layout Standard
31390 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31396 \begin_inset space \space{}
31399 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31405 \begin_inset space \space{}
31409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31421 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31425 \begin_inset space ~
31433 \begin_inset space ~
31439 Here is a simple example where the text
31440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31444 \begin_inset space ~
31448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31451 appears after the reference:
31454 \begin_layout Quote
31456 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31459 key "latexcompanion"
31467 \begin_layout Standard
31468 All styles except for
31472 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31482 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31486 \begin_layout Standard
31487 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31488 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31489 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31494 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31495 multi-citation (so-called
31496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31499 qualified citation lists
31500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31506 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31511 dialog will display three columns in the field
31518 \begin_inset space ~
31526 \begin_inset space ~
31534 \begin_inset space ~
31540 If you double-click on an item's
31543 \begin_inset space ~
31551 \begin_inset space ~
31556 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31559 General text before
31565 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31568 \begin_layout Section
31570 \begin_inset Index idx
31573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31589 \begin_layout Standard
31590 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31594 \begin_inset space ~
31599 or the toolbar button
31606 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31607 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31608 by \SpecialChar LyX
31609 as the index entry.
31612 \begin_layout Standard
31613 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31616 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31618 \begin_inset space ~
31624 A light blue box labeled
31625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31636 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31637 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31641 \begin_layout Standard
31642 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31643 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31644 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31645 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31647 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31649 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31657 \begin_layout Subsection
31658 Grouping Index Entries
31659 \begin_inset Index idx
31662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31671 \begin_layout Standard
31672 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31674 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31675 lists under the entry
31676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31684 First we create the entry
31685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31693 \begin_inset space ~
31697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31699 reference "subsec:Lists"
31704 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31705 \begin_inset space ~
31709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31711 reference "sec:Itemize"
31715 , we insert the command
31718 \begin_layout Standard
31724 \begin_layout Standard
31728 \begin_layout Standard
31734 \begin_layout Standard
31735 for the enumerated list in section
31736 \begin_inset space ~
31740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31742 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31749 \begin_layout Standard
31750 The exclamation mark
31751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31758 marks the grouping levels.
31759 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31760 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31761 If we don't have an index entry for
31762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31769 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31772 \begin_layout Subsection
31774 \begin_inset Index idx
31777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31778 Index ! Page ranges
31786 \begin_layout Standard
31787 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31789 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31790 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31791 an index entry in section
31792 \begin_inset space ~
31796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31798 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31805 \begin_layout Standard
31808 Paragraph environments|(
31811 \begin_layout Standard
31812 and another entry at the end of section
31813 \begin_inset space ~
31817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31819 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31826 \begin_layout Standard
31829 Paragraph environments|)
31832 \begin_layout Standard
31834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31857 respectively start and end the index range.
31858 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31859 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31860 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31861 An example is the index entry
31862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31865 Document ! Settings
31866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31872 \begin_layout Subsection
31874 \begin_inset Index idx
31877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31878 Index ! Cross referencing
31886 \begin_layout Standard
31887 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31888 We referred for example in the index entry
31889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31897 \begin_inset space ~
31901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31903 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31907 ) to the index entry
31908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31915 in the same section using the entry
31918 \begin_layout Standard
31921 GIF|see{Image formats}
31924 \begin_layout Standard
31925 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31927 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31928 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31931 \begin_layout Subsection
31933 \begin_inset Index idx
31936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31937 Index ! Entry order
31945 \begin_layout Standard
31946 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31947 follow the rules for the index order.
31948 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31954 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31956 \begin_inset space ~
31960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31962 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31971 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31972 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31997 \begin_inset Index idx
32000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32001 Dummy entries ! maïs
32007 \begin_inset Index idx
32010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32011 Dummy entries ! maître
32017 \begin_inset Index idx
32020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32021 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32026 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32027 maïs, maison, maître.
32028 To achieve this, we use the command
32031 \begin_layout Standard
32034 previous entry@current entry
32037 \begin_layout Standard
32038 In our case we want to have
32039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32054 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32057 \begin_layout Standard
32063 \begin_layout Standard
32064 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32065 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32067 See the next subsection for an example.
32070 \begin_layout Subsection
32072 \begin_inset Index idx
32075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32076 Index ! Entry layout
32084 \begin_layout Standard
32085 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32086 \begin_inset Index idx
32089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32092 This is an italic dummy entry
32097 You can also format the page number using the character
32098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32105 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32106 -command without a backslash.
32107 We can write for example
32110 \begin_layout Standard
32113 italic page number:|textit
32116 \begin_layout Standard
32117 to get the page number in italic.
32118 \begin_inset Index idx
32121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32122 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32127 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32128 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32146 \begin_inset space ~
32152 Have a look at section
32153 \begin_inset space ~
32157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32159 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32163 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32167 \begin_layout Standard
32168 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32176 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32180 to generate the index, see section
32181 \begin_inset space ~
32185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32187 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32196 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32201 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32202 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32205 key "latexcompanion"
32218 \begin_layout Standard
32219 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32221 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32222 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32223 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32224 If so, put the following in the preamble
32227 \begin_layout Standard
32239 \begin_layout Standard
32243 \begin_layout Standard
32249 \begin_layout Standard
32250 in the index entry.
32251 \begin_inset Index idx
32254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32255 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32260 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32261 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32262 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32265 \begin_layout Standard
32266 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32267 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32268 a bold font for all index entries.
32269 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32281 documentation for details,
32282 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32284 key "makeindex,xindy"
32292 \begin_layout Subsection
32294 \begin_inset Index idx
32297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32306 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32313 \begin_layout Standard
32314 If the index generation program
32318 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32319 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32323 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32324 distribution, is used.
32328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32333 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32334 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32335 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32336 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32337 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32347 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32349 dialog, see section
32350 \begin_inset space ~
32354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32356 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32361 The available options are listed and explained in
32362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32364 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32370 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32374 \begin_layout Standard
32375 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32376 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32379 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32380 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32384 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32385 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32388 \begin_layout Subsection
32392 \begin_layout Standard
32393 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32394 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32402 next to the standard index.
32404 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32405 that add this feature.
32412 \begin_inset Index idx
32415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32417 packages ! splitidx
32422 package to generate multiple indexes.
32423 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32429 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32431 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32439 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32440 style, but it also includes
32441 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32442 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32450 \begin_layout Standard
32451 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32452 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32454 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32455 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32458 and select the option
32460 Use multiple Indexes
32467 already contains the standard index
32468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32476 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32477 also appear as a heading) to the
32481 input field and press the
32486 The new index now also appears in the list.
32487 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32488 label color to the new index.
32491 \begin_layout Standard
32492 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32495 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32496 List/Contents/References
32502 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32503 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32504 are additional features:
32507 \begin_layout Itemize
32508 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32509 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32512 \begin_layout Itemize
32513 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32514 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32519 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32520 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32521 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32522 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32525 \begin_layout Itemize
32530 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32531 code in the name of the index.
32534 \begin_layout Section
32535 Nomenclature/Glossary
32536 \begin_inset Index idx
32539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32546 \begin_inset Index idx
32549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32580 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32587 \begin_layout Standard
32588 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32589 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32590 called nomenclature or glossary.
32593 \begin_layout Standard
32594 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32601 \begin_inset Index idx
32604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32612 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32614 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32621 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32625 \begin_layout Standard
32626 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32627 and then use the menu
32629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32635 \begin_inset space ~
32640 or the toolbar button
32643 arg "nomencl-insert"
32648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32659 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32662 \begin_layout Standard
32663 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32664 The first is the term or
32668 that you wish to define.
32673 of the term or symbol.
32676 \begin_layout Standard
32677 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32685 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32686 code for nomenclature entries the option
32690 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32698 \begin_layout Subsection
32699 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32700 \begin_inset Index idx
32703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32704 Nomenclature ! Layout
32712 \begin_layout Standard
32713 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32717 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32724 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32732 \begin_inset Newline newline
32740 \begin_inset Newline newline
32746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32753 character starts/ends the formula.
32754 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32755 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32767 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32777 \begin_layout Standard
32778 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32779 syntax is given in section
32780 \begin_inset space ~
32784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32786 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32793 \begin_layout Standard
32797 \begin_inset space ~
32802 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32804 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32809 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32816 in this document is:
32817 \begin_inset Newline newline
32822 dummy entry for the character
32827 \begin_inset Newline newline
32839 \begin_inset space ~
32849 font use the command
32878 \begin_layout Standard
32879 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32884 \begin_inset space \space{}
32888 \begin_inset Newline newline
32904 \begin_inset Newline newline
32907 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32908 This command will make the font of all symbols
32915 \begin_inset space ~
32923 \begin_layout Standard
32924 If the characters |
32925 \begin_inset space \space{}
32929 \begin_inset space \space{}
32933 \begin_inset space \space{}
32937 \begin_inset space \space{}
32941 \begin_inset space \space{}
32944 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32945 code they need to be escaped
32946 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32947 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32948 LatexCommand nomenclature
32949 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32950 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32958 \begin_layout Subsection
32959 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32960 \begin_inset Index idx
32963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32964 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32972 \begin_layout Standard
32973 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32974 -code of the symbol
32976 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32978 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32981 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32982 LatexCommand nomenclature
32984 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32992 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32996 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32997 LatexCommand nomenclature
33000 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33006 They will be sorted by
33007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33033 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33036 will be sorted before the
33040 since the character
33041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33048 is considered in sorting.
33051 \begin_layout Standard
33052 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33055 \begin_inset space ~
33060 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33061 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33063 For the example given, you can insert
33067 in this field for the
33068 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33075 will be located before
33076 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33082 \begin_layout Standard
33083 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33088 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33098 \begin_layout Subsection
33099 Nomenclature Options
33100 \begin_inset Index idx
33103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33104 Nomenclature ! Options
33110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33112 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33119 \begin_layout Standard
33124 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33125 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33128 \begin_layout Description
33129 refeq Appends the phrase
33130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33145 to every nomenclature entry, where
33151 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33154 \begin_layout Description
33155 refpage Appends the phrase
33156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33171 to every nomenclature entry, where
33177 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33180 \begin_layout Description
33181 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33184 \begin_layout Standard
33185 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33186 class options list in the
33188 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33192 In this document the options
33199 \begin_layout Standard
33200 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33206 \begin_layout Standard
33207 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33208 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33213 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33216 \begin_layout Description
33226 \begin_layout Description
33229 nomrefpage Like the
33236 \begin_layout Description
33239 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33248 \begin_layout Description
33252 \begin_inset space ~
33258 \begin_inset space ~
33263 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33266 \begin_layout Standard
33268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33275 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33276 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33280 \begin_layout Standard
33289 \begin_inset Newline newline
33295 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33299 \begin_inset space ~
33311 unskip, see equation
33314 \begin_inset Newline newline
33321 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33322 \begin_inset Newline newline
33328 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33332 \begin_inset space ~
33349 \begin_layout Standard
33350 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33353 \begin_inset space ~
33358 in the document settings under
33361 \begin_inset space ~
33369 \begin_layout Standard
33377 \begin_inset Newline newline
33381 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33385 \begin_inset space ~
33397 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33399 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33400 \begin_inset Newline newline
33407 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33408 \begin_inset Newline newline
33412 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33416 \begin_inset space ~
33428 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33433 \begin_layout Subsection
33434 Printing the Nomenclature
33435 \begin_inset Index idx
33438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33439 Nomenclature ! Printing
33447 \begin_layout Standard
33448 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33450 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33451 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33467 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33468 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33469 You can choose between these settings:
33472 \begin_layout Description
33473 Default a space of 1
33474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33480 \begin_layout Description
33482 \begin_inset space ~
33486 \begin_inset space ~
33489 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33492 \begin_layout Description
33493 Custom custom space
33496 \begin_layout Standard
33497 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33506 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33514 For example, in order to change the name to
33518 , add the following line to the preamble:
33521 \begin_layout Standard
33534 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33537 \begin_layout Standard
33538 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33539 \begin_inset Newline newline
33554 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33557 \begin_layout Subsection
33558 Nomenclature Program
33559 \begin_inset Index idx
33562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33563 Nomenclature ! Program
33569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33571 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33578 \begin_layout Standard
33584 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33585 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33587 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33592 by adding options, see section
33593 \begin_inset space ~
33597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33599 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33604 The available options are listed and explained in
33605 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33607 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33615 \begin_layout Section
33617 \begin_inset Index idx
33620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33627 \begin_inset Index idx
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33631 Document ! Branches
33637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33639 name "sec:Branches"
33646 \begin_layout Standard
33647 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33648 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33649 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33650 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33653 \begin_layout Standard
33654 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33655 allows you to put text into branches.
33656 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33657 To create a branch, either select the menu
33659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33660 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33663 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33665 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33672 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33673 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33674 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33675 and whether the name of the branch should
33676 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33677 (see below for an example).
33678 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33679 to the name of the other) and to add
33680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33692 \begin_inset space ~
33695 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33696 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33699 \begin_layout Standard
33700 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33701 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33706 where you can choose a branch.
33707 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33711 \begin_layout Standard
33712 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33713 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33716 \begin_layout Standard
33717 \begin_inset Branch Question
33721 \begin_layout Standard
33726 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33734 \begin_layout Standard
33735 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33739 \begin_layout Standard
33744 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33752 \begin_layout Standard
33759 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33760 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33763 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33764 Consider for example a file
33765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33772 which has the above branches.
33774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33781 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33805 branch were inactive,
33806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33821 branch was active, likewise
33822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33837 branch was active, and
33838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33841 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33845 if both branches were active.
33846 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33847 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33853 \begin_layout Standard
33854 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33860 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33861 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33865 \begin_inset space ~
33873 \begin_layout Standard
33874 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33878 \begin_layout Standard
33884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33891 branch is deactivated.
33897 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33903 \begin_layout Standard
33904 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33905 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33906 definitions for each branch.
33907 For example you can define for the question branch
33911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33912 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33913 -syntax, see section
33914 \begin_inset space ~
33918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33920 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33932 \begin_layout Standard
33942 \begin_layout Standard
33952 \begin_layout Standard
33953 and for the answer branch
33956 \begin_layout Standard
33966 \begin_layout Standard
33976 \begin_layout Standard
33977 \begin_inset Branch Question
33981 \begin_layout Standard
33985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34013 \begin_layout Standard
34014 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34018 \begin_layout Standard
34022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34050 \begin_layout Standard
34051 Now it is possible to use the
34055 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34062 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34065 commands to obtain conditional output.
34066 Here is an example formula where only the
34073 \begin_inset Formula
34075 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34083 \begin_layout Standard
34084 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34092 \begin_layout Standard
34093 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34099 \begin_inset space \space{}
34102 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34104 For this advanced usage, see the
34110 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34115 \begin_layout Section
34117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34119 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34124 \begin_inset Index idx
34127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34136 \begin_layout Standard
34139 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34140 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34143 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34145 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34151 \begin_inset Index idx
34154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34156 packages ! hyperref
34161 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34162 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34163 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34164 part of the document.
34168 \begin_layout Standard
34169 The header information in the dialog tab
34173 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34174 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34175 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34176 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34180 \begin_inset space ~
34184 \begin_inset space ~
34189 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34190 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34191 and author entries.
34195 \begin_inset space ~
34199 \begin_inset space ~
34203 \begin_inset space ~
34208 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34211 \begin_layout Standard
34212 You can specify in the dialog tab
34216 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34221 \begin_inset space ~
34225 \begin_inset space ~
34229 \begin_inset space ~
34234 option allows long links to be split;
34237 \begin_inset space ~
34241 \begin_inset space ~
34245 \begin_inset space ~
34253 \begin_inset space ~
34258 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34261 \begin_inset space ~
34266 colors the different links.
34267 The default colors are:
34270 \begin_layout Labeling
34271 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34276 for hyperlinks and URLs
34279 \begin_layout Labeling
34280 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34288 \begin_layout Labeling
34289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34297 \begin_layout Standard
34298 but you can change these in the field
34303 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34306 \begin_layout Standard
34309 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34312 \begin_layout Standard
34317 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34318 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34319 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34322 \begin_layout Standard
34327 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34328 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34329 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34339 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34340 when opening the PDF.
34342 \begin_inset space ~
34345 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34346 \begin_inset space ~
34349 1 will only display the sections.
34352 \begin_layout Standard
34353 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34354 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34360 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34361 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34371 \begin_layout Section
34373 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34377 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34384 \begin_layout Subsection
34387 \begin_inset Index idx
34390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34400 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34407 \begin_layout Standard
34408 As \SpecialChar LyX
34409 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34410 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34411 commands and constructs,
34414 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34415 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34416 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34417 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34418 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34419 cannot support all packages and
34423 \begin_layout Standard
34424 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34425 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34426 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34430 Code box is created by the menu
34432 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34434 \begin_inset space ~
34439 or by the toolbar button
34452 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34460 \begin_layout Standard
34461 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34463 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34465 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34470 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34475 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34482 , you can write the command part
34488 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34489 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34493 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34494 Code box behind the word.
34495 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34496 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34500 \begin_layout Standard
34501 \begin_inset Graphics
34502 filename clipart/ERT.png
34510 \begin_layout Standard
34514 \begin_layout Standard
34515 This is a line with a
34519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34542 \begin_layout Standard
34543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34551 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34552 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34553 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34554 know that the command is finished.
34562 \begin_layout Subsection
34563 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34565 \begin_inset Argument 1
34568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34569 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34576 \begin_inset Index idx
34579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34589 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34596 \begin_layout Standard
34597 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34598 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34599 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34600 uses in the background.
34601 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34602 is based on commands, you can
34603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34611 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34612 any time if you know the right commands.
34613 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34614 is the end of the day.
34615 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34616 all caption labels bold.
34617 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34619 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34623 \begin_layout Standard
34624 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34626 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34628 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34631 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34641 \begin_layout Standard
34642 As result you find that the package
34647 \begin_inset Index idx
34650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34658 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34660 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34663 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34667 \begin_inset space ~
34675 \begin_layout Standard
34680 usepackage[options]{package name}
34683 \begin_layout Standard
34684 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34685 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34686 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34687 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34690 \begin_layout Standard
34691 In your case the package name is
34696 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34701 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34702 So you add the command
34705 \begin_layout Standard
34710 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34713 \begin_layout Standard
34714 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34719 For more commands provided by the
34723 package, have a look at its documentation,
34724 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34739 \begin_layout Standard
34740 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34742 For example if you use a
34746 class, you don't need the package
34750 , you can instead write
34753 \begin_layout Standard
34758 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34763 \begin_layout Standard
34764 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34765 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34766 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34773 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34776 \begin_layout Standard
34777 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34778 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34780 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34781 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34782 Code box as described in the previous
34786 \begin_layout Standard
34787 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34788 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34791 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34793 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34801 \begin_layout Standard
34802 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34808 \begin_layout Standard
34812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34822 \begin_inset Note Note
34825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34826 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34834 \begin_layout Left Header
34835 \begin_inset Argument 1
34838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34858 \begin_inset Note Note
34861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34862 defines the header line as described below
34870 \begin_layout Center Header
34871 \begin_inset Argument 1
34874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34883 \begin_layout Right Header
34884 \begin_inset Argument 1
34887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34908 \begin_layout Left Footer
34909 \begin_inset Argument 1
34912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34933 \begin_layout Center Footer
34934 \begin_inset Argument 1
34937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34949 \begin_inset Newline newline
34953 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34959 \begin_layout Right Footer
34960 \begin_inset Argument 1
34963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34985 \begin_layout Section
34986 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34989 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34994 \begin_inset Index idx
34997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34998 Document ! Header/Footer line
35004 \begin_inset Index idx
35007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35016 \begin_layout Standard
35017 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35021 \begin_inset space ~
35032 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35038 \begin_inset space ~
35044 As a second step add in the menu
35046 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35047 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35056 Custom Header/Footerlines
35059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35063 This module offers the following 6
35064 \begin_inset space ~
35070 \begin_layout Description
35072 \begin_inset space ~
35076 \begin_inset space ~
35080 \begin_inset space ~
35084 \begin_inset space ~
35088 \begin_inset space ~
35094 \begin_layout Description
35096 \begin_inset space ~
35100 \begin_inset space ~
35104 \begin_inset space ~
35108 \begin_inset space ~
35112 \begin_inset space ~
35118 \begin_layout Standard
35119 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35120 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35123 \begin_layout Standard
35124 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35125 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35127 \begin_inset space ~
35131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35133 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35137 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35140 \begin_layout Standard
35141 \begin_inset Float figure
35148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35151 \begin_inset Tabular
35152 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35153 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35154 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35155 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35156 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35158 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35176 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35187 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35205 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35216 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35220 The normal text on the page goes here.
35221 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35223 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35224 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35229 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35238 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35249 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35267 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35278 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35296 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35314 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35319 name "fig:Page-layout"
35323 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35336 \begin_layout Standard
35337 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35345 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35349 \begin_inset space ~
35354 is set to “Default”.
35355 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35364 \begin_layout Subsection
35368 \begin_layout Standard
35369 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35370 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35371 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35372 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35374 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35376 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35379 \begin_layout Standard
35380 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35381 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35385 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35387 \begin_inset space ~
35395 \begin_layout Description
35398 thepage prints the current page number
35401 \begin_layout Description
35404 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35407 \begin_layout Description
35410 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35413 \begin_layout Description
35416 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35417 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35424 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35427 because it usually goes in a left header.
35430 \begin_layout Description
35433 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35434 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35436 It is normally used in the right header.
35439 \begin_layout Subsection
35440 Default header/footer
35443 \begin_layout Standard
35444 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35445 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35446 footer has the page number.
35447 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35448 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35449 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35452 \begin_inset space ~
35460 \begin_layout Subsection
35464 \begin_layout Standard
35465 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35466 Some pages are different.
35467 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35468 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35469 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35470 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35471 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35474 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35475 Header and footer decoration line
35478 \begin_layout Standard
35479 By default, you get a 0.4
35480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35483 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35484 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35496 in the following way:
35499 \begin_layout Standard
35506 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35509 \begin_layout Standard
35510 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35523 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35530 \begin_layout Standard
35531 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35533 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35534 \begin_inset space ~
35538 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35549 Several header/footer lines
35552 \begin_layout Standard
35553 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35554 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35555 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35557 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35573 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35575 \begin_inset space ~
35583 \begin_layout Standard
35590 headheight}{height}
35593 \begin_layout Standard
35598 is a size in standard units (e.
35599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35603 \begin_inset space \space{}
35611 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35612 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35613 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35614 logfile with the menu
35616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35618 \begin_inset space ~
35626 \begin_inset space ~
35631 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35636 \begin_inset Index idx
35639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35641 packages ! fancyhdr
35647 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35648 for your header/footer.
35651 \begin_layout Subsection
35655 \begin_layout Standard
35656 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35657 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35658 This example consists of the following definition:
35661 \begin_layout Description
35663 \begin_inset space ~
35672 , empty optional argument
35675 \begin_layout Description
35677 \begin_inset space ~
35680 Header empty, empty optional argument
35683 \begin_layout Description
35685 \begin_inset space ~
35694 in the optional argument
35697 \begin_layout Description
35699 \begin_inset space ~
35708 in the optional argument
35711 \begin_layout Description
35713 \begin_inset space ~
35726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35730 \begin_inset Newline newline
35734 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35741 in the optional argument
35744 \begin_layout Description
35746 \begin_inset space ~
35755 , empty optional argument
35758 \begin_layout Description
35761 headrulewidth set to 2
35762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35768 \begin_layout Standard
35769 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35770 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35776 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35786 \begin_layout Standard
35787 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35793 \begin_layout Standard
35797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35801 pagestyle{headings}
35807 \begin_inset Note Note
35810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35811 switches back to page style with the default headings
35819 \begin_layout Section
35820 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35823 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35828 \begin_inset Index idx
35831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35838 \begin_inset Index idx
35841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35850 \begin_layout Standard
35852 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35853 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35854 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35857 \begin_layout Subsection
35861 \begin_layout Standard
35862 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35868 \begin_inset Index idx
35871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35873 packages ! preview-latex
35878 (on some systems named simply
35883 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35885 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35892 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35894 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35902 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35903 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35904 -package are automatically
35905 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35909 \begin_layout Subsection
35913 \begin_layout Standard
35914 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35915 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35917 activate the option
35920 \begin_inset space ~
35927 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35933 \begin_inset space ~
35937 \begin_inset space ~
35940 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35947 \begin_inset space ~
35960 \begin_inset space ~
35965 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35968 \begin_layout Standard
35969 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35974 \begin_inset space ~
35982 \begin_inset space ~
35990 \begin_layout Standard
35991 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35992 and when you finish
35996 \begin_layout Standard
35997 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36005 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36006 generated by activating the option
36009 \begin_inset space ~
36015 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36023 \begin_layout Subsection
36024 Selected document parts
36027 \begin_layout Standard
36028 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36029 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36030 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36031 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36033 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36035 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36039 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36040 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36041 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36044 \begin_layout Standard
36045 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36052 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36064 is explained in section
36066 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36071 \begin_inset space ~
36081 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36082 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36083 the final rotated boxes,
36084 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36085 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36087 Here is the result:
36090 \begin_layout Standard
36091 \begin_inset Preview
36093 \begin_layout Standard
36098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36102 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36108 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36118 height_special "totalheight"
36123 backgroundcolor "none"
36126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36151 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36157 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36179 \begin_layout Standard
36180 Previewing works also for colors.
36181 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36200 is explained in section
36207 \begin_inset space ~
36220 \begin_layout Standard
36221 \begin_inset Preview
36223 \begin_layout Standard
36227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36246 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36251 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36270 \begin_layout Standard
36271 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36277 \begin_layout Standard
36278 If \SpecialChar LyX
36279 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36280 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36281 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36282 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36283 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36284 the \SpecialChar TeX
36286 If \SpecialChar LyX
36287 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36288 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36290 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36291 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36292 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36295 \begin_layout Subsection
36300 \begin_layout Standard
36301 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36302 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36305 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36307 \begin_inset space ~
36312 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36314 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36316 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36317 's main window, then only this selection
36318 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36319 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36320 the source view window.
36325 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36326 ; but note that if you have
36327 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36329 not just the one which is open at the time.
36332 \begin_layout Section
36333 Advanced Find and Replace
36334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36336 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36341 \begin_inset Index idx
36344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36351 \begin_inset Index idx
36354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36363 \begin_layout Subsection
36367 \begin_layout Standard
36368 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36369 allows for searching of complex,
36370 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36372 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36373 The key-features are:
36376 \begin_layout Itemize
36377 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36378 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36379 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36383 \begin_layout Itemize
36384 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36385 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36386 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36387 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36390 \begin_layout Itemize
36391 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36392 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36393 outside of mathematics environments
36396 \begin_layout Itemize
36397 Search may be widened to a specific
36402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36406 \begin_inset space ~
36409 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36410 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36417 \begin_layout Itemize
36418 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36419 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36424 \begin_inset space ~
36427 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36430 \begin_layout Subsection
36434 \begin_layout Standard
36435 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36437 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36450 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36453 ) or the toolbar button
36456 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36462 Advanced Find and Replace
36467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36471 \begin_layout Standard
36477 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36481 \begin_inset space ~
36486 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36489 arg "paragraph-break"
36493 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36494 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36498 arg "paragraph-break"
36501 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36505 searches backwards.
36508 \begin_layout Standard
36512 \begin_inset space ~
36517 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36526 \begin_inset space ~
36531 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36534 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36535 Searching for mathematics
36538 \begin_layout Standard
36539 Mathematical formulas, such as
36540 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36543 or something more complex like
36544 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36547 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36552 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36553 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36554 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36555 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36561 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36565 \begin_layout Standard
36566 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36567 This is done by switching to the
36571 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36576 This way, entering in the
36583 \begin_layout Itemize
36584 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36585 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36588 \begin_layout Itemize
36589 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36590 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36593 \begin_layout Itemize
36594 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36595 of it only within section headings.
36596 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36597 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36601 \begin_layout Itemize
36602 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36603 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36606 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36610 \begin_layout Standard
36611 The entries made in the
36615 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36624 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36628 button or alternatively press
36631 arg "paragraph-break"
36638 while the cursor is in the
36641 \begin_inset space ~
36649 \begin_layout Standard
36650 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36652 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36656 \begin_layout Itemize
36657 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36658 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36666 with its typewriter version
36667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36681 \begin_layout Itemize
36682 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36688 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36700 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36707 (you may want to enable the
36710 \begin_inset space ~
36718 \begin_inset space ~
36723 options and disable the
36731 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36739 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36740 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36744 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36747 , or occurrences of
36748 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36752 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36758 \begin_layout Subsection
36762 \begin_layout Standard
36763 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36768 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36770 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36772 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36782 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36788 This is done with the context menu
36790 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36791 Insert Regular Expression
36793 while the cursor is in the
36798 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36799 expression matching rules
36803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36804 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36811 \begin_inset space ~
36814 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36815 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36821 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36822 same text in the document.
36823 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36824 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36827 \begin_layout Enumerate
36828 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36833 editor the fraction
36834 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36838 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36841 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36842 fractions with the given denominator.
36845 \begin_layout Enumerate
36846 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36858 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36863 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36864 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36865 Also, by inserting a
36866 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36869 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36870 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36873 \begin_layout Standard
36874 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36875 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36876 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36879 , and referring back to them through
36880 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36884 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36888 For example, try searching with the regexp
36889 \begin_inset Newline newline
36892 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36895 \begin_inset Newline newline
36898 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36901 \begin_layout Standard
36902 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36905 \begin_layout Standard
36906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36914 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36915 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36916 sub-expressions is absolute.
36918 \begin_inset space ~
36922 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36925 always refers to the first occurrence of
36926 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36929 in all entered regexps.
36937 \begin_layout Section
36939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36941 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36946 \begin_inset Index idx
36949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36958 \begin_layout Standard
36960 has a built-in spell checker.
36963 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36970 key or the toolbar button
36973 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36976 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36977 beginning of the currently selected text.
36978 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36979 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36980 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36981 scrolled so that it is visible.
36982 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36983 n, if any could be found.
36984 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36988 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36989 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36992 \begin_layout Standard
36993 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36996 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37000 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37001 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37003 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37004 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37007 \begin_inset space ~
37015 arg "dialog-show character"
37018 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37020 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37023 \begin_layout Standard
37024 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37025 can be downloaded from here:
37026 \begin_inset Newline newline
37030 \begin_inset Flex URL
37033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37035 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37041 \begin_inset Newline newline
37045 \begin_inset space ~
37048 files for each language.
37049 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37050 \begin_inset space ~
37053 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37054 's installation subfolder
37062 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37064 \begin_inset Newline newline
37067 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37068 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37069 but in most cases these are
37085 is the language code.
37088 \begin_layout Subsection
37092 \begin_layout Standard
37095 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37096 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37098 \begin_inset space ~
37101 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37104 you can set the following things:
37107 \begin_layout Description
37109 \begin_inset space ~
37112 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37113 should use for spell checking.
37114 Depending on your platform,
37124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37125 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37126 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37141 \begin_inset space ~
37144 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37147 \begin_layout Description
37149 \begin_inset space ~
37152 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37153 will always use the given language
37154 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37157 \begin_layout Description
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37162 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37168 \begin_inset space \space{}
37172 This should normally not be needed.
37175 \begin_layout Description
37177 \begin_inset space ~
37181 \begin_inset space ~
37184 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37196 \begin_layout Description
37198 \begin_inset space ~
37201 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37202 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37203 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37204 appear in a context menu.
37205 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37209 \begin_layout Description
37211 \begin_inset space ~
37215 \begin_inset space ~
37219 \begin_inset space ~
37222 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37226 \begin_layout Section
37228 \begin_inset Index idx
37231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37240 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37247 \begin_layout Standard
37249 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37250 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37260 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37262 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37272 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37274 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37275 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37276 which are available for many languages.
37279 \begin_layout Standard
37280 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37281 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37285 \begin_layout Subsection
37286 Setting up the thesaurus
37289 \begin_layout Standard
37298 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37302 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37307 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37313 \begin_inset space ~
37321 For instance, the US English files are named:
37324 \begin_layout Itemize
37328 \begin_layout Itemize
37332 \begin_layout Standard
37341 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37342 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37345 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37346 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37347 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37349 \begin_inset space ~
37354 ) to the path where they are installed.
37358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37359 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37360 ies, typical locations are
37366 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37370 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37374 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37377 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37383 LibreOffice-<Version>
37390 On the Mac, the default location is
37392 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37393 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37394 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37395 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37396 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37397 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37405 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37406 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37407 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37411 \begin_layout Standard
37412 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37413 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37415 \begin_inset Newline newline
37419 \begin_inset Flex URL
37422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37424 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37432 \begin_layout Standard
37433 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37434 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37436 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37437 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37438 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37440 \begin_inset space ~
37445 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37447 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37448 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37452 \begin_layout Standard
37453 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37455 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37458 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37464 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37467 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37468 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37476 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37477 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37478 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37480 \begin_inset space ~
37485 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37488 \begin_layout Subsection
37489 Using the thesaurus
37492 \begin_layout Standard
37493 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37498 or the toolbar button
37501 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37504 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37506 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37508 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37509 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37510 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37519 ), related terms (such as
37522 \begin_inset space ~
37531 ), compounds (such as
37534 \begin_inset space ~
37543 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37552 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37555 \begin_layout Standard
37556 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37557 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37561 \begin_layout Standard
37562 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37563 the dictionary, such as the above
37567 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37572 \begin_inset space \space{}
37575 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37576 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37577 For example, looking up the word form
37581 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37586 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37591 \begin_inset space \space{}
37602 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37603 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37604 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37607 \begin_layout Section
37609 \begin_inset Index idx
37612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37619 \begin_inset Index idx
37622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37623 Document ! Change Tracking
37629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37631 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37638 \begin_layout Standard
37639 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37640 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37641 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37642 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37644 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37646 \begin_inset space ~
37649 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37651 \begin_inset space ~
37659 \begin_layout Standard
37660 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37674 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37675 You can change the color in
37677 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37678 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37680 \begin_inset space ~
37684 \begin_inset space ~
37689 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37695 \begin_inset Index idx
37698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37699 Color ! Change tracking
37704 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37705 's status bar when the
37706 cursor is in changed text.
37707 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37710 arg "changes-merge"
37716 \begin_layout Standard
37717 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37719 \begin_inset Index idx
37722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37731 \begin_layout Standard
37732 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37738 \begin_layout Standard
37739 \begin_inset Graphics
37740 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37748 \begin_layout Standard
37749 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37755 \begin_layout Standard
37756 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37759 \begin_layout Standard
37760 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37766 \begin_layout Standard
37767 \begin_inset Tabular
37768 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37769 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37770 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37771 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37772 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37781 arg "changes-track"
37789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37795 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37797 \begin_inset space ~
37800 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37802 \begin_inset space ~
37811 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37820 arg "changes-output"
37828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37834 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37836 \begin_inset space ~
37839 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37841 \begin_inset space ~
37845 \begin_inset space ~
37849 \begin_inset space ~
37858 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37879 Jumps to the next change
37885 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37894 arg "change-accept"
37902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37910 \begin_inset space ~
37913 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37915 \begin_inset space ~
37924 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37933 arg "change-reject"
37941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37947 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37949 \begin_inset space ~
37952 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37954 \begin_inset space ~
37963 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37972 arg "changes-merge"
37980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37988 \begin_inset space ~
37991 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37993 \begin_inset space ~
38002 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38011 arg "all-changes-accept"
38019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38025 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38027 \begin_inset space ~
38030 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38032 \begin_inset space ~
38036 \begin_inset space ~
38045 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38054 arg "all-changes-reject"
38062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38068 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38070 \begin_inset space ~
38073 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38088 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38112 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38114 \begin_inset space ~
38123 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38146 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38148 \begin_inset space ~
38164 \begin_layout Standard
38165 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38171 \begin_layout Standard
38172 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38192 \begin_layout Standard
38193 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38194 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38195 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38196 the next change after the current cursor position.
38197 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38198 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38199 step to the next change.
38200 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38203 \begin_layout Standard
38204 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38205 to describe a change.
38208 \begin_layout Standard
38210 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38211 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38217 \begin_inset Index idx
38220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38228 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38230 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38237 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38243 \begin_layout Section
38244 Comparison of Documents
38245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38247 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38252 \begin_inset Index idx
38255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38256 Comparison of documents
38264 \begin_layout Standard
38265 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38268 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38272 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38273 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38275 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38277 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38281 \begin_inset space ~
38285 \begin_inset space ~
38289 \begin_inset space ~
38298 \begin_inset space ~
38302 \begin_inset space ~
38306 \begin_inset space ~
38310 \begin_inset space ~
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38318 \begin_inset space ~
38323 enables the change tracking option
38326 \begin_inset space ~
38330 \begin_inset space ~
38334 \begin_inset space ~
38339 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38342 \begin_layout Section
38343 International Support
38344 \begin_inset Index idx
38347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38348 International support
38356 \begin_layout Standard
38357 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38358 with any language you want.
38359 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38360 up \SpecialChar LyX
38362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38364 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38372 \begin_layout Standard
38373 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38374 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38375 \begin_inset space ~
38379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38381 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38388 \begin_layout Subsection
38390 \begin_inset Index idx
38393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38400 \begin_inset Index idx
38403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38404 Document ! Settings
38410 \begin_inset Index idx
38413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38414 Document ! Language
38422 \begin_layout Standard
38425 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38426 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38429 dialog lets you set
38431 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38436 \begin_layout Standard
38441 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38446 \begin_inset space ~
38451 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38452 For details about the different encoding options see section
38453 \begin_inset space ~
38457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38459 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38466 \begin_layout Subsection
38467 Keyboard mapping configuration
38468 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38470 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38477 \begin_layout Standard
38478 If you have for example a U.
38479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38482 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38483 can use an alternate keymap.
38484 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38489 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38490 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38491 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38494 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38495 \begin_inset space ~
38499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38501 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38506 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38507 which one you want to use.
38510 \begin_layout Standard
38511 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38512 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38513 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38517 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38518 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38519 one to support the characters you want.
38520 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38527 \begin_layout Chapter
38530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38532 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38539 \begin_layout Standard
38540 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38541 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38542 topic inside the user's guide.
38545 \begin_layout Section
38547 \begin_inset Index idx
38550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38559 \begin_layout Standard
38564 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38567 \begin_layout Subsection
38571 \begin_layout Standard
38572 Creates a new document.
38575 \begin_layout Subsection
38579 \begin_layout Standard
38580 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38581 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38582 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38584 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38585 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38591 \begin_layout Subsection
38595 \begin_layout Standard
38599 \begin_layout Subsection
38603 \begin_layout Standard
38604 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38605 Click there on a file to open it.
38608 \begin_layout Subsection
38610 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38614 \begin_layout Standard
38616 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38617 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38621 \begin_layout Subsection
38625 \begin_layout Standard
38626 Closes the current document.
38629 \begin_layout Subsection
38633 \begin_layout Standard
38634 Closes all opened documents.
38637 \begin_layout Subsection
38641 \begin_layout Standard
38642 Saves the actual document.
38645 \begin_layout Subsection
38649 \begin_layout Standard
38650 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38651 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38655 \begin_layout Subsection
38657 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38661 \begin_layout Standard
38663 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38664 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38670 \begin_layout Subsection
38674 \begin_layout Standard
38675 Saves all opened documents.
38678 \begin_layout Subsection
38682 \begin_layout Standard
38683 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38686 \begin_layout Subsection
38690 \begin_layout Standard
38691 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38692 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38693 It is described in the section
38695 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38700 Additional Features
38705 \begin_layout Subsection
38709 \begin_layout Standard
38710 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38711 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38713 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38714 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38718 \begin_layout Standard
38719 When using the menu entry
38722 \begin_inset space ~
38727 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38731 \begin_inset space ~
38735 \begin_inset space ~
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38744 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38745 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38748 \begin_layout Subsection
38750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38752 name "subsec:Export"
38759 \begin_layout Standard
38760 You can export your document to various file formats.
38761 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38763 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38764 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38765 during its configuration.
38768 \begin_layout Standard
38769 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38771 \begin_inset space ~
38775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38777 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38784 \begin_layout Description
38790 \begin_inset space ~
38793 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38795 \begin_inset space ~
38798 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38799 \begin_inset Newline newline
38802 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38803 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38807 \begin_layout Description
38808 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38814 \begin_layout Description
38816 \begin_inset space ~
38819 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38825 \begin_layout Description
38826 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38827 's native DVI-format.
38828 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38829 files paths or file names in your document.
38831 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38838 \begin_layout Description
38839 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
38840 in files paths or file names
38843 \begin_layout Description
38845 \begin_inset space ~
38852 ) DVI-format using the program
38854 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38857 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38861 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38869 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38877 \begin_layout Description
38879 \begin_inset space ~
38882 (cropped) the same as
38886 but with cropped page margins.
38889 \begin_layout Description
38891 \begin_inset space ~
38894 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38898 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38903 \begin_layout Description
38907 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38915 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38923 \begin_layout Description
38925 \begin_inset space ~
38929 \begin_inset space ~
38932 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38936 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38944 \begin_layout Description
38948 \begin_inset space ~
38957 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38958 source that is compilable with the program
38960 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38964 \begin_layout Description
38968 \begin_inset space ~
38973 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38974 source, additionally all images used in the document
38975 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38979 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38982 \begin_layout Description
38986 \begin_inset space ~
38991 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38992 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38993 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39001 \begin_layout Description
39005 \begin_inset space ~
39014 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39015 source that is compilable with the program
39021 \begin_layout Description
39023 \begin_inset space ~
39027 \begin_inset space ~
39034 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39035 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39041 \begin_layout Description
39043 \begin_inset space ~
39046 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39047 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39053 \begin_inset space \space{}
39058 \begin_inset space ~
39062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39077 represent the version number)
39080 \begin_layout Description
39082 \begin_inset space ~
39086 \begin_inset space ~
39089 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39090 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39091 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39095 \begin_layout Description
39096 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39097 's internal XHTML engine
39100 \begin_layout Description
39102 \begin_inset space ~
39106 \begin_inset space ~
39110 \begin_inset space ~
39114 \begin_inset space ~
39117 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39122 For the conversion the program
39131 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39134 \begin_layout Description
39135 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39140 \begin_layout Description
39142 \begin_inset space ~
39145 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39147 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39150 For the conversion the program
39159 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39162 \begin_layout Description
39164 \begin_inset space ~
39167 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39168 For the conversion the program
39177 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39180 \begin_layout Description
39182 \begin_inset space ~
39185 (cropped) the same as
39188 \begin_inset space ~
39193 but with cropped page margins
39196 \begin_layout Description
39200 \begin_inset space ~
39205 PDF-format using the program
39209 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39212 \begin_layout Description
39216 \begin_inset space ~
39220 \begin_inset space ~
39228 \begin_inset space ~
39233 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39238 \begin_inset space \space{}
39241 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39245 \begin_layout Description
39249 \begin_inset space ~
39254 PDF-format using the program
39256 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39259 , produces PDF-files directly
39262 \begin_layout Description
39266 \begin_inset space ~
39271 PDF-format using the program
39275 , produces PDF-files directly
39278 \begin_layout Description
39282 \begin_inset space ~
39287 PDF-format using the program
39291 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39294 \begin_layout Description
39298 \begin_inset space ~
39303 PDF-format using the program
39308 , produces PDF-files directly
39311 \begin_layout Description
39315 \begin_inset space ~
39323 \begin_layout Description
39327 \begin_inset space ~
39331 \begin_inset space ~
39336 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39337 and then exported as text using the program
39342 \begin_layout Description
39347 PostScript format using the program
39355 options see section
39356 \begin_inset space ~
39360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39362 reference "subsec:General-output"
39369 \begin_layout Description
39370 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39371 source and also code in the statistical programming
39385 it is possible to use
39389 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39393 \begin_layout Standard
39394 If one of the menu entries
39401 \begin_inset space ~
39410 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39412 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39414 \begin_inset space ~
39418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39420 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39425 \begin_inset Index idx
39428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39438 \begin_layout Subsection
39442 \begin_layout Standard
39443 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39444 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39447 \begin_inset space ~
39451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39453 reference "sec:Paths"
39458 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39467 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39468 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39469 's preferences as described in section
39470 \begin_inset space ~
39474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39476 reference "subsec:Converters"
39483 \begin_layout Subsection
39484 New and Close Window
39487 \begin_layout Standard
39488 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39492 \begin_layout Subsection
39496 \begin_layout Standard
39497 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39500 \begin_layout Section
39502 \begin_inset Index idx
39505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39514 \begin_layout Subsection
39518 \begin_layout Standard
39519 Described in section
39520 \begin_inset space ~
39524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39526 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39533 \begin_layout Subsection
39534 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39537 \begin_layout Standard
39538 Described in section
39539 \begin_inset space ~
39543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39545 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39552 \begin_layout Subsection
39556 \begin_layout Standard
39557 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39558 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39561 \begin_layout Subsection
39565 \begin_layout Standard
39566 Selects the whole document.
39569 \begin_layout Subsection
39570 Find & Replace (Quick)
39573 \begin_layout Standard
39574 Described in section
39575 \begin_inset space ~
39579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39581 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39588 \begin_layout Subsection
39589 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39592 \begin_layout Standard
39593 Described in section
39594 \begin_inset space ~
39598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39600 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39607 \begin_layout Subsection
39608 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39611 \begin_layout Standard
39612 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39616 \begin_layout Subsection
39618 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39622 \begin_layout Standard
39624 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39625 Described in section
39626 \begin_inset space ~
39630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39632 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39641 \begin_layout Subsection
39643 \begin_inset Index idx
39646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39647 Paragraph ! Settings
39655 \begin_layout Standard
39656 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39657 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39661 \begin_layout Standard
39662 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39663 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39669 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39670 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39672 \begin_inset space ~
39678 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39682 \begin_layout Subsection
39684 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39688 \begin_layout Standard
39690 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39691 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39696 \begin_layout Enumerate
39698 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39699 Customize text properties by means of the
39705 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39708 ; this is described in section
39709 \begin_inset space ~
39713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39715 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39722 \begin_layout Enumerate
39724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39725 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39727 Apply last settings
39730 \begin_layout Enumerate
39732 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39733 Change the casing of selected text (
39748 \begin_layout Subsection
39750 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39754 \begin_layout Standard
39756 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39757 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39758 text styles (in the case of this document:
39780 \begin_inset space ~
39784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39786 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39795 \begin_layout Subsection
39796 Table and Rows & Columns
39799 \begin_layout Standard
39800 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39801 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39802 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39805 \begin_layout Subsection
39809 \begin_layout Standard
39810 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39811 It will dissolve this inset.
39812 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39816 \begin_layout Subsection
39820 \begin_layout Standard
39821 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39822 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39825 \begin_layout Subsection
39826 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39829 \begin_layout Standard
39830 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39832 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39833 \begin_inset space ~
39837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39839 reference "sec:Nesting"
39844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39846 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39853 \begin_layout Section
39855 \begin_inset Index idx
39858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39867 \begin_layout Standard
39868 At the bottom of the
39872 menu the opened documents are listed.
39875 \begin_layout Subsection
39876 Open/Close all Insets
39879 \begin_layout Standard
39880 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39883 \begin_layout Subsection
39884 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39887 \begin_layout Standard
39888 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39891 \begin_layout Standard
39892 Math macros are described in the
39899 \begin_layout Subsection
39903 \begin_layout Standard
39904 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39905 \begin_inset space ~
39909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39911 reference "sec:Navigating"
39916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39918 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39925 \begin_layout Subsection
39929 \begin_layout Standard
39930 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39932 \begin_inset space ~
39936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39938 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39945 \begin_layout Subsection
39949 \begin_layout Standard
39950 Opens a window showing console messages.
39951 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39956 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39957 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39958 is processing the document.
39961 \begin_layout Subsection
39963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39965 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39970 \begin_inset Index idx
39973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39982 \begin_layout Standard
39983 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39985 All toolbars and the
39988 \begin_inset space ~
39993 can be turned on and off.
39998 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40010 \begin_inset space ~
40022 \begin_inset space ~
40027 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40031 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40038 \begin_layout Standard
40043 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40047 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40048 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40049 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40050 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40051 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40054 \begin_layout Standard
40056 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40057 \begin_inset space ~
40061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40063 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40070 \begin_layout Subsection
40074 \begin_layout Standard
40078 \begin_inset space ~
40082 \begin_inset space ~
40086 \begin_inset space ~
40090 \begin_inset space ~
40094 \begin_inset space ~
40098 \begin_inset space ~
40103 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40104 's main window vertically while
40107 \begin_inset space ~
40111 \begin_inset space ~
40115 \begin_inset space ~
40119 \begin_inset space ~
40123 \begin_inset space ~
40127 \begin_inset space ~
40132 will split it horizontally.
40133 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40134 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40135 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40136 three or more documents at the same time.
40137 To close a split view, use the menu
40140 \begin_inset space ~
40144 \begin_inset space ~
40152 \begin_layout Subsection
40156 \begin_layout Standard
40157 Closes a split view.
40160 \begin_layout Subsection
40164 \begin_layout Standard
40165 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40166 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40167 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40168 's main window fullscreen.
40169 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40170 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40173 \begin_layout Section
40175 \begin_inset Index idx
40178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40187 \begin_layout Subsection
40191 \begin_layout Standard
40192 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40193 \begin_inset space ~
40197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40199 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40210 \begin_layout Subsection
40212 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40214 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40221 \begin_layout Standard
40222 Here you can insert the following characters:
40225 \begin_layout Description
40230 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40233 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40234 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40235 -packages you have installed.
40236 You can get a complete display by checking
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40245 \begin_inset Newline newline
40249 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40257 Not all characters will be visible in the
40261 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40262 dialog (see section
40263 \begin_inset space ~
40267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40269 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40273 ) can display every character.
40281 \begin_layout Description
40282 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40286 \begin_layout Description
40288 \begin_inset space ~
40292 \begin_inset space ~
40295 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40296 \begin_inset space ~
40300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40302 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40309 \begin_layout Description
40311 \begin_inset space ~
40314 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40317 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40318 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40324 \begin_layout Description
40326 \begin_inset space ~
40329 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40332 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40333 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40339 \begin_layout Description
40341 \begin_inset space ~
40344 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40348 \begin_layout Description
40350 \begin_inset space ~
40353 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40357 \begin_layout Description
40359 \begin_inset space ~
40362 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40368 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40374 \begin_layout Description
40376 \begin_inset space ~
40379 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40383 \begin_layout Description
40385 \begin_inset space ~
40389 \begin_inset Index idx
40392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40399 \begin_inset Index idx
40402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40403 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40408 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40409 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40411 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40417 \begin_inset Index idx
40420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40428 \begin_inset Newline newline
40431 More information about this feature can be found in the
40437 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40443 \begin_layout Description
40444 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40446 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40447 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40451 \begin_layout Subsection
40455 \begin_layout Standard
40456 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40459 \begin_layout Description
40460 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40461 \begin_inset script superscript
40463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40472 \begin_layout Description
40473 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40474 \begin_inset script subscript
40476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40485 \begin_layout Description
40487 \begin_inset space ~
40490 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40491 \begin_inset space ~
40495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40497 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40504 \begin_layout Description
40506 \begin_inset space ~
40509 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40516 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40523 \begin_layout Description
40525 \begin_inset space ~
40528 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40529 \begin_inset space ~
40533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40535 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40542 \begin_layout Description
40544 \begin_inset space ~
40547 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40553 \begin_inset space \space{}
40556 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40557 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40566 To insert a fraction use the command
40571 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40575 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40584 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40591 \begin_layout Description
40593 \begin_inset space ~
40596 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40597 \begin_inset space ~
40601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40603 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40610 \begin_layout Description
40612 \begin_inset space ~
40615 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40616 \begin_inset space ~
40620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40622 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40629 \begin_layout Description
40631 \begin_inset space ~
40634 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40635 \begin_inset space ~
40639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40641 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40648 \begin_layout Description
40649 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40650 \begin_inset space ~
40654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40656 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40663 \begin_layout Description
40665 \begin_inset space ~
40668 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40669 \begin_inset space ~
40673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40675 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40682 \begin_layout Description
40684 \begin_inset space ~
40687 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40688 \begin_inset space ~
40692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40694 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40701 \begin_layout Description
40703 \begin_inset space ~
40707 \begin_inset space ~
40710 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40713 \begin_inset space ~
40717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40719 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40726 for a usage example.
40729 \begin_layout Description
40731 \begin_inset space ~
40735 \begin_inset space ~
40738 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40739 \begin_inset space ~
40743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40745 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40752 \begin_layout Description
40754 \begin_inset space ~
40757 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40758 as described in section
40759 \begin_inset space ~
40763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40765 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40772 \begin_layout Description
40774 \begin_inset space ~
40777 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40778 \begin_inset space ~
40782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40784 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40791 \begin_layout Description
40793 \begin_inset space ~
40796 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40797 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40799 \begin_inset space ~
40803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40805 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40812 \begin_layout Description
40814 \begin_inset space ~
40817 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40818 \begin_inset space ~
40822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40824 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40831 \begin_layout Description
40833 \begin_inset space ~
40837 \begin_inset space ~
40840 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40841 \begin_inset space ~
40845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40847 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40854 \begin_layout Subsection
40856 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40860 \begin_layout Standard
40862 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40863 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40864 The submenu allows you to insert
40867 \begin_layout Description
40869 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40871 \begin_inset space ~
40874 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40877 \begin_layout Description
40879 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40881 \begin_inset space ~
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40888 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40892 \begin_layout Description
40894 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40896 \begin_inset space ~
40899 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40902 \begin_layout Description
40904 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40909 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40912 \begin_layout Description
40914 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40920 \begin_inset space ~
40923 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40927 \begin_layout Description
40929 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40931 \begin_inset space ~
40934 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40937 \begin_layout Description
40939 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40941 \begin_inset space ~
40945 \begin_inset space ~
40949 \begin_inset space ~
40952 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40955 \begin_layout Description
40957 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40959 \begin_inset space ~
40962 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40964 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40965 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40971 \begin_layout Description
40973 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40975 \begin_inset space ~
40978 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40980 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40981 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40987 \begin_layout Description
40989 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40990 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40991 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40992 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40995 \begin_layout Subsection
40998 List/Contents/References
41001 \begin_layout Standard
41002 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41006 \begin_inset space ~
41027 are described in section
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41034 reference "sec:toc"
41043 is described in section
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41050 reference "sec:Index"
41058 is described in section
41059 \begin_inset space ~
41063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41065 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41071 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41074 is described in section
41075 \begin_inset space ~
41079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41081 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41088 \begin_layout Subsection
41092 \begin_layout Standard
41093 To insert floats, as described in section
41094 \begin_inset space ~
41098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41100 reference "sec:Floats"
41104 and in detail the chapter
41111 \begin_inset space ~
41119 \begin_layout Subsection
41123 \begin_layout Standard
41124 To insert notes, described in section
41125 \begin_inset space ~
41129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41131 reference "sec:Notes"
41138 \begin_layout Subsection
41142 \begin_layout Standard
41143 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41145 Branches are described in section
41146 \begin_inset space ~
41150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41152 reference "sec:Branches"
41159 \begin_layout Subsection
41163 \begin_layout Standard
41164 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41165 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41167 An example is the document class
41168 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41178 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41187 with three custom insets.
41190 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41194 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41200 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41203 \begin_layout Subsection
41205 \begin_inset Index idx
41208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41217 \begin_layout Standard
41218 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41220 For more information see chapter
41222 External Document Parts
41225 \begin_inset space ~
41231 \begin_layout Subsection
41233 \begin_inset Index idx
41236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41245 \begin_layout Standard
41246 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41247 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41254 \begin_inset space ~
41262 \begin_layout Subsection
41266 \begin_layout Standard
41271 dialog as described in section
41272 \begin_inset space ~
41276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41278 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41285 \begin_layout Subsection
41289 \begin_layout Standard
41294 as described in section
41295 \begin_inset space ~
41299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41301 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41308 \begin_layout Subsection
41312 \begin_layout Standard
41317 as described in section
41318 \begin_inset space ~
41322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41324 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41331 \begin_layout Subsection
41333 \begin_inset Index idx
41336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41343 \begin_inset Index idx
41346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41347 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41355 \begin_layout Standard
41356 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41357 Floats are described in section
41358 \begin_inset space ~
41362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41364 reference "sec:Floats"
41368 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41370 Multi-page Captions
41375 \begin_inset space ~
41383 \begin_layout Subsection
41387 \begin_layout Standard
41388 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41389 \begin_inset space ~
41393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41395 reference "sec:Index"
41402 \begin_layout Subsection
41406 \begin_layout Standard
41407 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41408 \begin_inset space ~
41412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41414 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41421 \begin_layout Subsection
41425 \begin_layout Standard
41426 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41427 Tables are described in section
41428 \begin_inset space ~
41432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41434 reference "sec:Tables"
41438 and in detail in the chapter
41445 \begin_inset space ~
41453 \begin_layout Subsection
41457 \begin_layout Standard
41463 Graphics are described in section
41464 \begin_inset space ~
41468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41470 reference "sec:Graphics"
41477 \begin_layout Subsection
41481 \begin_layout Standard
41482 Inserts a URL as described in section
41483 \begin_inset space ~
41487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41489 reference "subsec:URLs"
41496 \begin_layout Subsection
41500 \begin_layout Standard
41501 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41502 \begin_inset space ~
41506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41508 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41515 \begin_layout Subsection
41519 \begin_layout Standard
41520 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41521 \begin_inset space ~
41525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41527 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41534 \begin_layout Subsection
41538 \begin_layout Standard
41539 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41540 \begin_inset space ~
41544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41546 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41553 \begin_layout Subsection
41556 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41559 \begin_layout Standard
41560 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41561 environments of the same type.
41563 \begin_inset space ~
41567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41569 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41573 for an explanation.
41576 \begin_layout Subsection
41580 \begin_layout Standard
41581 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41582 title or caption of a float.
41583 Inserts a short title as described in section
41584 \begin_inset space ~
41588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41590 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41597 \begin_layout Subsection
41602 \begin_layout Standard
41603 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41604 Code box as described in section
41605 \begin_inset space ~
41609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41611 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41618 \begin_layout Subsection
41620 \begin_inset Index idx
41623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41632 \begin_layout Standard
41633 Inserts a program listings box.
41634 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41636 Program Code Listings
41641 \begin_inset space ~
41649 \begin_layout Subsection
41651 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41655 \begin_layout Standard
41657 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41658 Inserts the actual date.
41659 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41666 \begin_layout Subsection
41670 \begin_layout Standard
41671 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41672 \begin_inset space ~
41676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41678 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41685 \begin_layout Section
41687 \begin_inset Index idx
41690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41699 \begin_layout Standard
41700 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41701 \begin_inset space ~
41704 of the current document.
41705 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41708 \begin_layout Subsection
41712 \begin_layout Standard
41713 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41714 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41715 to jump, for example, between section
41716 \begin_inset space ~
41720 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41721 \begin_inset space ~
41724 2.5 and use the submenu
41727 \begin_inset space ~
41731 \begin_inset space ~
41738 \begin_inset space ~
41744 \begin_inset space ~
41748 \begin_inset space ~
41754 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41758 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41764 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41767 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41770 \begin_layout Standard
41771 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41775 \begin_inset space ~
41780 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41783 \begin_inset space ~
41788 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41791 \begin_layout Subsection
41792 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41795 \begin_layout Standard
41796 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41800 \begin_layout Subsection
41804 \begin_layout Standard
41805 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41806 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41807 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41811 \begin_inset space ~
41815 \begin_inset space ~
41823 \begin_layout Subsection
41827 \begin_layout Standard
41828 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41831 The \SpecialChar LyX
41832 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41834 \begin_inset space ~
41842 \begin_inset space ~
41847 manual for a detailed description.
41850 \begin_layout Section
41852 \begin_inset Index idx
41855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41864 \begin_layout Subsection
41868 \begin_layout Standard
41869 Change Tracking is described in section
41870 \begin_inset space ~
41874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41876 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41883 \begin_layout Subsection
41891 \begin_layout Standard
41892 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41893 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41894 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41896 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41897 to the clipboard or update the view.
41898 \begin_inset Newline newline
41901 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41905 \begin_layout Standard
41908 Open Containing Directory
41910 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41911 's temporary folder for the document.
41912 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41913 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41914 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41915 For example some journals require to send the
41919 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41923 \begin_layout Subsection
41924 Start Appendix Here
41927 \begin_layout Standard
41928 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41929 as described in section
41930 \begin_inset space ~
41934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41936 reference "sec:Appendices"
41943 \begin_layout Subsection
41945 \begin_inset space ~
41951 \begin_layout Standard
41952 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41953 default output format for the document (menu
41955 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41956 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41957 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41959 \begin_inset space ~
41963 \begin_inset space ~
41969 \begin_inset space ~
41973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41975 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41979 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41982 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41983 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41985 \begin_inset space ~
41988 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41990 \begin_inset space ~
41993 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41995 \begin_inset space ~
41999 \begin_inset space ~
42005 \begin_inset space ~
42009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42011 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42015 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42016 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42018 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42019 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42021 \begin_inset space ~
42024 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42026 \begin_inset space ~
42029 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42033 \begin_inset space ~
42037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42039 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42044 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42045 when it is first configured.
42046 The default output format is
42049 \begin_inset space ~
42057 \begin_layout Subsection
42058 View (Other Formats)
42061 \begin_layout Standard
42062 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42063 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42064 actual document with an external program.
42065 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42066 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42067 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42069 All possible formats are listed in section
42070 \begin_inset space ~
42074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42076 reference "subsec:Export"
42081 You should at least see the menu entry
42086 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42088 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42090 \begin_inset space ~
42094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42096 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42101 \begin_inset Index idx
42104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42105 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42114 \begin_layout Standard
42115 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42116 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42118 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42119 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42121 \begin_inset space ~
42124 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42126 \begin_inset space ~
42129 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42133 \begin_inset space ~
42137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42139 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42144 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42145 when it is first configured.
42148 \begin_layout Subsection
42150 \begin_inset space ~
42156 \begin_layout Standard
42157 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42158 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42161 \begin_layout Subsection
42162 Update (Other Formats)
42165 \begin_layout Standard
42166 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42167 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42170 \begin_layout Subsection
42171 View Master Document
42174 \begin_layout Standard
42175 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42191 \begin_inset space ~
42196 manual for more information on this topic).
42197 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42198 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42202 \begin_inset space ~
42206 \begin_inset space ~
42211 generates the output of the whole book, while
42215 will just output the chapter alone.
42218 \begin_layout Standard
42219 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42220 in the document settings (menu
42222 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42223 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42224 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42226 \begin_inset space ~
42230 \begin_inset space ~
42236 \begin_inset space ~
42240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42242 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42246 ) or in the preferences (menu
42248 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42249 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42251 \begin_inset space ~
42254 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42256 \begin_inset space ~
42259 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42261 \begin_inset space ~
42265 \begin_inset space ~
42271 \begin_inset space ~
42275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42277 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42284 \begin_layout Subsection
42285 Update Master Document
42288 \begin_layout Standard
42289 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42305 \begin_inset space ~
42310 manual for more information on this topic).
42311 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42312 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42315 \begin_layout Standard
42316 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42317 in the document settings (menu
42319 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42320 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42321 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42323 \begin_inset space ~
42327 \begin_inset space ~
42333 \begin_inset space ~
42337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42339 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42343 ) or in the preferences (menu
42345 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42346 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42348 \begin_inset space ~
42351 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42353 \begin_inset space ~
42356 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42358 \begin_inset space ~
42362 \begin_inset space ~
42368 \begin_inset space ~
42372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42374 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42381 \begin_layout Subsection
42383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42385 name "subsec:Compressed"
42392 \begin_layout Standard
42393 Un/compresses the current document.
42394 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42395 compression (see the
42397 Additional Features
42399 manual for details).
42402 \begin_layout Subsection
42406 \begin_layout Standard
42407 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42410 \begin_layout Subsection
42414 \begin_layout Standard
42415 The document settings are described in appendix
42416 \begin_inset space ~
42420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42422 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42429 \begin_layout Section
42431 \begin_inset Index idx
42434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42443 \begin_layout Subsection
42447 \begin_layout Standard
42448 Spell checking is explained in section
42449 \begin_inset space ~
42453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42455 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42462 \begin_layout Subsection
42466 \begin_layout Standard
42467 The thesaurus is described in section
42468 \begin_inset space ~
42472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42474 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42481 \begin_layout Subsection
42483 \begin_inset Index idx
42486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42493 \begin_inset Index idx
42496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42505 \begin_layout Standard
42506 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42507 the highlighted document part.
42510 \begin_layout Subsection
42516 \begin_inset Index idx
42519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42520 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42529 \begin_layout Standard
42530 Generates with the help of the program
42532 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42535 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42536 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42537 This feature is not available on Windows.
42540 \begin_layout Subsection
42546 \begin_inset Index idx
42549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42559 \begin_layout Standard
42560 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42565 \begin_inset space ~
42570 to see the full filename paths.
42573 \begin_layout Subsection
42575 \begin_inset Index idx
42578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42587 \begin_layout Standard
42588 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42589 files as described in section
42590 \begin_inset space ~
42594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42596 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42603 \begin_layout Subsection
42605 \begin_inset Index idx
42608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42621 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42639 \begin_inset Index idx
42642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42643 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42652 \begin_layout Standard
42653 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42654 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42655 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42656 -packages and programs it needs; see
42658 \begin_inset space ~
42662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42664 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42671 \begin_layout Subsection
42675 \begin_layout Standard
42680 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42681 \begin_inset space ~
42685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42687 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42694 \begin_layout Section
42696 \begin_inset Index idx
42699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42708 \begin_layout Standard
42709 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42710 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42712 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42716 \begin_layout Standard
42720 \begin_inset space ~
42725 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42726 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42727 packages and classes found
42728 by \SpecialChar LyX
42730 \begin_inset space ~
42734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42736 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42743 \begin_layout Standard
42747 \begin_inset space ~
42752 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42757 \begin_layout Section
42759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42761 name "sec:Toolbars"
42768 \begin_layout Standard
42769 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42770 \begin_inset space ~
42774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42776 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42783 \begin_layout Standard
42784 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42785 This is described in the
42787 Additional Features
42792 \begin_layout Subsection
42794 \begin_inset Index idx
42797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42806 \begin_layout Standard
42807 \begin_inset Graphics
42808 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42816 \begin_layout Standard
42817 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42823 \begin_layout Standard
42824 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42841 \begin_inset Note Note
42844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42845 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42850 manual for more information.
42858 \begin_layout Standard
42859 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42865 \begin_layout Standard
42866 \begin_inset Tabular
42867 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42868 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42869 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42870 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42876 \begin_inset Graphics
42877 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42891 pull-down box for the environments
42904 \begin_layout Standard
42905 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42911 \begin_layout Standard
42913 \begin_inset Tabular
42914 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42915 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42916 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42917 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42941 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42948 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42971 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42978 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43001 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43017 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43031 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43047 arg "spelling-continuously"
43055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43059 Spellcheck continuously
43065 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43088 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43118 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43148 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43155 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43178 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43185 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43208 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43210 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43215 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43233 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43247 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43266 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43273 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43287 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43306 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43315 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43329 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43330 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43337 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43358 Emphasize text, function of the
43359 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43362 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43364 \begin_inset space ~
43367 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43369 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43375 arg "dialog-show character"
43386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43407 Set text to noun style, function of the
43408 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43411 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43413 \begin_inset space ~
43416 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43418 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43424 arg "dialog-show character"
43435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43441 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43444 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43457 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43460 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43467 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43473 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43478 arg "textstyle-apply"
43488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43493 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43494 Format text using the current settings in the
43496 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43498 \begin_inset space ~
43501 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43535 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43536 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43538 \begin_inset space ~
43547 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43556 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43577 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43584 arg "tabular-insert"
43592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43598 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43611 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43614 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43627 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43630 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43637 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43646 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43658 Toggle outline window on/off,
43660 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43667 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43676 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43688 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43694 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43703 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43715 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43728 \begin_layout Subsection
43730 \begin_inset Index idx
43733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43742 \begin_layout Standard
43743 \begin_inset Graphics
43744 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43752 \begin_layout Standard
43753 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43759 \begin_layout Standard
43760 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43764 \begin_layout Standard
43765 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43771 \begin_layout Standard
43772 \begin_inset Tabular
43773 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43774 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43775 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43776 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43777 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43813 arg "layout Enumerate"
43821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43831 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43840 arg "layout Itemize"
43848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43858 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43885 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43894 arg "layout Description"
43902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43912 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43921 arg "depth-increment"
43929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43935 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43937 \begin_inset space ~
43941 \begin_inset space ~
43950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43959 arg "depth-decrement"
43967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43973 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43975 \begin_inset space ~
43979 \begin_inset space ~
43988 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43997 arg "float-insert figure"
44005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44011 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44012 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44028 arg "float-insert table"
44036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44042 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44043 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44050 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44073 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44080 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44089 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44103 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44110 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44119 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44133 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44163 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44165 \begin_inset space ~
44174 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44183 arg "nomencl-insert"
44191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44199 \begin_inset space ~
44208 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44217 arg "footnote-insert"
44225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44238 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44247 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44263 \begin_inset space ~
44272 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44295 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44296 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44298 \begin_inset space ~
44307 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44316 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44330 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44337 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44360 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44367 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44390 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44392 \begin_inset space ~
44401 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44410 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44425 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44432 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44441 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44455 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44456 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44458 \begin_inset space ~
44467 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44476 arg "dialog-show character"
44484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44492 \begin_inset space ~
44495 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44502 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44508 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44513 arg "textstyle-apply"
44521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44526 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44527 Format text using the recent settings in the
44530 arg "dialog-show character"
44539 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44548 arg "layout-paragraph"
44556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44562 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44564 \begin_inset space ~
44573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44582 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44596 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44610 \begin_layout Subsection
44611 View/Update Toolbar
44612 \begin_inset Index idx
44615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44616 Toolbar ! View / Update
44624 \begin_layout Standard
44625 \begin_inset Graphics
44626 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44633 \begin_layout Standard
44634 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44640 \begin_layout Standard
44641 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44645 \begin_layout Standard
44646 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44652 \begin_layout Standard
44653 \begin_inset Tabular
44654 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44655 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44656 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44657 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44658 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44681 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44688 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44697 arg "buffer-update"
44705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44711 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44727 arg "master-buffer-view"
44735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44743 \begin_inset space ~
44752 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44761 arg "master-buffer-update"
44769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44775 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44777 \begin_inset space ~
44781 \begin_inset space ~
44790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44799 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44813 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44814 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44815 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44816 Synchronize with Output
44822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44833 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44849 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44850 View (Other Formats)
44856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44863 arg "update-others"
44867 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44882 Update (Other Formats)
44895 \begin_layout Standard
44897 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44898 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44904 \begin_layout Subsection
44908 \begin_layout Standard
44909 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44910 \begin_inset space ~
44914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44916 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44920 , the table toolbar
44921 \begin_inset Index idx
44924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44933 \begin_inset space ~
44938 manual and the math macro toolbar
44939 \begin_inset Index idx
44942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44955 \begin_layout Chapter
44956 The Document Settings
44957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44959 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44964 \begin_inset Index idx
44967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44968 Document ! Settings
44976 \begin_layout Standard
44980 \begin_inset space ~
44985 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44986 is called with the menu
44988 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44992 You can save your document settings as default with the
44994 Save as Document Defaults
44996 button in any dialog.
44997 This will create a template named
45001 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45002 when you create a new document without
45006 \begin_layout Standard
45011 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45012 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45015 \begin_layout Standard
45016 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45017 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45018 to find the one you are looking for.
45019 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45020 the submenus of the dialog.
45022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45026 \begin_inset space \space{}
45030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45037 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45038 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45039 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45042 \begin_layout Section
45046 \begin_layout Standard
45047 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45049 Document classes are described in section
45050 \begin_inset space ~
45054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45056 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45064 \begin_layout Standard
45068 \begin_inset space ~
45073 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45078 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45079 as a layout for a document class.
45080 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45082 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45091 \begin_layout Standard
45092 Some classes use special class options by default.
45093 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45097 and you can decide to use them or not.
45098 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45099 recommended you leave them untouched.
45104 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45105 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45110 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45112 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45118 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45119 \begin_inset Newline newline
45124 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45127 \begin_inset Newline newline
45130 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45131 distribution, see section
45136 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45138 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45151 \begin_layout Standard
45156 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45157 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45158 in the background if the child document
45159 is opened without its master.
45160 This way child documents are always compilable.
45161 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45168 \begin_inset space ~
45176 \begin_layout Standard
45177 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45188 \begin_inset Index idx
45191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45193 packages ! prettyref
45199 \begin_inset Index idx
45202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45204 packages ! refstyle
45209 for cross-references, see section
45210 \begin_inset space ~
45214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45216 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45223 \begin_layout Section
45227 \begin_layout Standard
45228 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45229 Please refer to the section
45232 \begin_inset space ~
45240 \begin_inset space ~
45245 manual for details.
45248 \begin_layout Section
45252 \begin_layout Standard
45253 Modules are explained in section
45254 \begin_inset space ~
45258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45260 reference "subsec:Modules"
45267 \begin_layout Section
45271 \begin_layout Standard
45273 \begin_inset space ~
45277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45279 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45286 \begin_layout Section
45290 \begin_layout Standard
45291 The document font settings are described in section
45292 \begin_inset space ~
45296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45298 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45305 \begin_layout Section
45309 \begin_layout Standard
45310 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45322 \begin_inset space ~
45327 and whether it should be a
45330 \begin_inset space ~
45335 can also be specified here.
45338 \begin_layout Standard
45339 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45340 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45341 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45343 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45346 \begin_layout Standard
45349 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45352 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45353 justifies the text on screen.
45354 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45356 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45360 \begin_layout Standard
45362 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45371 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45376 \begin_layout Section
45380 \begin_layout Standard
45381 This dialog is described in sections
45382 \begin_inset space ~
45386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45388 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45395 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45402 \begin_layout Section
45406 \begin_layout Standard
45407 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45408 \begin_inset space ~
45412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45414 reference "subsec:Margins"
45421 \begin_layout Section
45423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45425 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45430 \begin_inset Index idx
45433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45434 Language ! Encoding
45442 \begin_layout Standard
45443 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45444 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45445 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45447 is always encoded in utf8).
45448 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45449 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45450 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45451 -command is not known for
45452 a particular character).
45453 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45457 \begin_layout Standard
45459 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45460 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45461 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45462 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45463 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45464 's default encoding).
45465 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45466 's Unicode support covers the
45467 characters of most scripts.
45468 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45469 using one of the traditional, or
45470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45477 , encodings is necessary.
45480 \begin_layout Standard
45482 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45484 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45487 Traditional (auto-selected)
45493 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45494 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45495 the given language(s).
45497 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45501 \begin_layout Standard
45503 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45504 If you use the option
45509 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45512 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45513 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45516 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45519 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45520 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45521 exactly one encoding.
45522 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45527 \begin_layout Standard
45529 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45530 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45536 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45537 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45541 \begin_layout Standard
45543 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45544 Finally, you can also select
45548 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45549 Note that this encoding is then used for
45554 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45555 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45559 \begin_layout Standard
45561 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45564 Do not load inputenc
45566 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45567 from automatically loading the
45574 \begin_inset Index idx
45577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45579 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45581 packages ! inputenc
45587 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45588 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45589 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45590 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45591 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45593 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45599 Traditional (auto-selected)
45606 \begin_layout Standard
45608 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45610 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45611 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45612 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45613 installation supports Unicode), choose
45614 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45615 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45616 is quite incomplete, so
45617 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45622 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45623 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45624 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45625 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45626 -commands is not used, because all
45627 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45628 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45629 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45630 , two new alternative engines
45631 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45633 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45635 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45638 \begin_inset space ~
45646 \begin_inset space ~
45654 \begin_inset space ~
45660 \begin_inset space ~
45664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45666 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45671 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45675 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45680 \begin_layout Standard
45684 \begin_inset space ~
45689 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45690 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45700 The possible settings are:
45703 \begin_layout Description
45704 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45706 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45707 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45711 \begin_inset space ~
45715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45717 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45724 \begin_layout Description
45725 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45726 format you will use.
45727 In many cases this will be
45732 \begin_inset Index idx
45735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45743 If the newer package
45748 \begin_inset Index idx
45751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45753 packages ! polyglossia
45758 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45759 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45760 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45762 this package will be used instead of
45769 \begin_layout Description
45771 \begin_inset space ~
45782 would be more appropriate.
45785 \begin_layout Description
45786 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45787 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45791 (for German texts), type in
45794 \begin_inset Newline newline
45799 usepackage{ngerman}
45802 \begin_layout Description
45803 None will not use a language package.
45804 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45807 \begin_layout Standard
45808 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45811 \begin_layout Description
45813 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
45815 \begin_inset space ~
45819 \begin_inset space ~
45823 \begin_inset space ~
45830 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45836 \begin_inset Index idx
45839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45841 packages ! inputenc
45847 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45848 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45849 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45855 \begin_layout Description
45856 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45858 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45859 commands, which may result in a big
45860 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45861 -commands are needed.
45863 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
45864 This is the same as the
45877 \begin_layout Description
45879 \begin_inset space ~
45883 \begin_inset space ~
45886 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45889 \begin_layout Description
45891 \begin_inset space ~
45895 \begin_inset space ~
45898 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45901 \begin_layout Description
45903 \begin_inset space ~
45906 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45909 \begin_layout Description
45911 \begin_inset space ~
45915 \begin_inset space ~
45918 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45919 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45922 \begin_layout Description
45924 \begin_inset space ~
45928 \begin_inset space ~
45931 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45935 \begin_layout Description
45937 \begin_inset space ~
45941 \begin_inset space ~
45944 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45945 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45948 \begin_layout Description
45950 \begin_inset space ~
45954 \begin_inset space ~
45958 \begin_inset space ~
45961 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45962 \begin_inset space ~
45968 \begin_layout Description
45970 \begin_inset space ~
45974 \begin_inset space ~
45978 \begin_inset space ~
45981 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45982 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45985 \begin_layout Description
45987 \begin_inset space ~
45991 \begin_inset space ~
45994 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45995 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45996 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45997 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45998 \begin_inset space ~
46002 \begin_inset space ~
46008 \begin_layout Description
46010 \begin_inset space ~
46014 \begin_inset space ~
46017 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46018 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46019 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46021 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46022 \begin_inset space ~
46026 \begin_inset space ~
46032 \begin_layout Description
46034 \begin_inset space ~
46038 \begin_inset space ~
46041 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46044 \begin_layout Description
46046 \begin_inset space ~
46050 \begin_inset space ~
46053 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46056 \begin_layout Description
46058 \begin_inset space ~
46062 \begin_inset space ~
46065 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46068 \begin_layout Description
46070 \begin_inset space ~
46073 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46076 \begin_layout Description
46078 \begin_inset space ~
46081 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46084 \begin_layout Description
46086 \begin_inset space ~
46090 \begin_inset space ~
46093 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46096 \begin_layout Description
46098 \begin_inset space ~
46102 \begin_inset space ~
46108 \begin_layout Description
46110 \begin_inset space ~
46114 \begin_inset space ~
46117 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46120 \begin_layout Description
46122 \begin_inset space ~
46126 \begin_inset space ~
46132 \begin_layout Description
46134 \begin_inset space ~
46138 \begin_inset space ~
46141 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46147 \begin_inset Index idx
46150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46157 , when using this, set the document language to
46162 \begin_layout Description
46164 \begin_inset space ~
46168 \begin_inset space ~
46171 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46176 , when using this, set the document language to
46179 \begin_inset space ~
46185 \begin_layout Description
46187 \begin_inset space ~
46191 \begin_inset space ~
46194 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46200 \begin_inset Index idx
46203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46205 packages ! japanese
46210 , when using this, set the document language to
46215 \begin_layout Description
46217 \begin_inset space ~
46221 \begin_inset space ~
46224 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46229 , when using this, set the document language to
46234 \begin_layout Description
46236 \begin_inset space ~
46240 \begin_inset space ~
46243 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46248 , when using this, set the document language to
46253 \begin_layout Description
46255 \begin_inset space ~
46258 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46261 \begin_layout Description
46263 \begin_inset space ~
46267 \begin_inset space ~
46271 \begin_inset space ~
46274 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46277 \begin_layout Description
46279 \begin_inset space ~
46283 \begin_inset space ~
46287 \begin_inset space ~
46290 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46291 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46292 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46295 \begin_layout Description
46297 \begin_inset space ~
46301 \begin_inset space ~
46307 \begin_layout Description
46309 \begin_inset space ~
46313 \begin_inset space ~
46316 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46317 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46320 \begin_layout Description
46322 \begin_inset space ~
46326 \begin_inset space ~
46329 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46335 \begin_inset Index idx
46338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46345 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46346 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46348 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46349 with the default encoding (
46351 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46357 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46358 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46363 \begin_layout Description
46365 \begin_inset space ~
46373 \begin_inset space ~
46376 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46383 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46386 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46393 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46394 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46396 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46399 \begin_layout Description
46401 \begin_inset space ~
46405 \begin_inset space ~
46408 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46414 \begin_inset Index idx
46417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46425 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46428 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46430 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46431 This used to be more comprehensive than
46434 \begin_inset space ~
46439 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46444 \begin_layout Description
46446 \begin_inset space ~
46449 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46455 \begin_inset Index idx
46458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46460 packages ! inputenc
46467 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46468 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46470 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46471 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46472 with the default encoding (
46474 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46480 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46481 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46486 \begin_layout Description
46488 \begin_inset space ~
46492 \begin_inset space ~
46496 \begin_inset space ~
46499 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46500 \begin_inset space ~
46506 \begin_layout Description
46508 \begin_inset space ~
46512 \begin_inset space ~
46516 \begin_inset space ~
46519 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46520 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46521 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46525 \begin_layout Description
46527 \begin_inset space ~
46531 \begin_inset space ~
46535 \begin_inset space ~
46538 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46539 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46542 \begin_layout Section
46544 \begin_inset Index idx
46547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46554 \begin_inset Index idx
46557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46564 \begin_inset Index idx
46567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46568 Color ! Shaded boxes
46574 \begin_inset Index idx
46577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46578 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46586 \begin_layout Standard
46587 Here you can alter the font color for the
46591 (default: black), for
46594 \begin_inset space ~
46599 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46603 (default: white) and for
46606 \begin_inset space ~
46616 sets the color back to the default.
46619 \begin_layout Standard
46620 Clicking any button showing
46628 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46629 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46630 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46631 later more quickly.
46634 \begin_layout Standard
46635 Note, if you change the
46638 \begin_inset space ~
46643 font color and use the option
46646 \begin_inset space ~
46651 in the document settings under
46654 \begin_inset space ~
46659 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46660 \begin_inset space ~
46664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46666 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46673 \begin_layout Standard
46674 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46680 \begin_layout Standard
46684 \begin_inset space ~
46693 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46696 \begin_inset space ~
46699 Code after a forced page break:
46702 \begin_layout Itemize
46703 For the page color:
46704 \begin_inset Newline newline
46711 pagecolor{color name}
46714 \begin_layout Itemize
46715 For the text color:
46716 \begin_inset Newline newline
46726 \begin_layout Standard
46727 You are restricted to one of
46763 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46770 \begin_inset space ~
46776 \begin_inset Newline newline
46779 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46780 names to refer to them:
46783 \begin_layout Itemize
46789 \begin_inset Newline newline
46794 page_backgroundcolor
46797 \begin_layout Itemize
46801 \begin_inset space ~
46807 \begin_inset Newline newline
46815 \begin_layout Itemize
46819 \begin_inset space ~
46825 \begin_inset Newline newline
46833 \begin_layout Itemize
46837 \begin_inset space ~
46843 \begin_inset Newline newline
46851 \begin_layout Standard
46852 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46855 \begin_inset space ~
46863 \begin_inset space ~
46871 \begin_layout Section
46873 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
46877 \begin_layout Standard
46879 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
46880 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
46881 \begin_inset space ~
46885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46887 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46895 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
46896 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
46899 \begin_layout Standard
46901 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
46902 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
46904 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
46907 \begin_layout Section
46911 \begin_layout Standard
46912 Here you can adjust the
46916 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46920 as described in section
46921 \begin_inset space ~
46925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46927 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46932 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
46936 \begin_layout Standard
46938 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
46939 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
46941 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
46942 of this package can be used as well.
46943 The most common one are:
46946 \begin_layout Description
46948 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
46949 right Line numbers to the right margin
46952 \begin_layout Description
46954 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
46955 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
46959 \begin_layout Description
46961 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
46962 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
46965 \begin_layout Description
46967 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
46968 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
46971 \begin_layout Description
46973 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
46975 \begin_inset space ~
46978 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
46983 \begin_layout Section
46987 \begin_layout Standard
46988 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46994 \begin_inset Index idx
46997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46999 packages ! biblatex
47009 \begin_inset Index idx
47012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47024 \begin_inset Index idx
47027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47035 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47038 Sectioned bibliography
47040 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47046 \begin_inset Index idx
47049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47051 packages ! bibtopic
47061 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47062 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47066 for the generation of the bibliography.
47067 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47068 \begin_inset space ~
47072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47074 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47081 \begin_layout Section
47085 \begin_layout Standard
47086 Here you can define the
47090 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47092 \begin_inset space ~
47096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47098 reference "sec:Index"
47105 \begin_layout Section
47109 \begin_layout Standard
47110 The PDF properties are explained in section
47111 \begin_inset space ~
47115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47117 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47124 \begin_layout Section
47128 \begin_layout Standard
47129 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47130 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47136 \begin_inset Index idx
47139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47151 \begin_inset Index idx
47154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47166 \begin_inset Index idx
47169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47181 \begin_inset Index idx
47184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47196 \begin_inset Index idx
47199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47201 packages ! mathdots
47211 \begin_inset Index idx
47214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47216 packages ! mathtools
47226 \begin_inset Index idx
47229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47241 \begin_inset Index idx
47244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47246 packages ! stackrel
47256 \begin_inset Index idx
47259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47261 packages ! stmaryrd
47271 \begin_inset Index idx
47274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47276 packages ! undertilde
47281 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47284 \begin_layout Description
47285 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47286 -errors in formulas,
47287 ensure that you have this enabled.
47290 \begin_layout Description
47291 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47292 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47293 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47297 \begin_layout Description
47298 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47301 \begin_inset space ~
47313 \begin_layout Description
47314 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47317 \begin_inset space ~
47329 \begin_layout Description
47330 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47341 \begin_layout Description
47342 mathtools is used for the math commands
47378 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47385 \begin_layout Description
47386 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47388 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47397 \begin_layout Description
47398 stackrel is used for the math command
47415 \begin_layout Description
47416 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47419 \begin_layout Description
47420 undertilde is used for the math command
47428 Accents for one Character
47437 \begin_layout Section
47439 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47441 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47447 \begin_layout Standard
47449 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47450 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47453 \begin_layout Standard
47455 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47456 The float placement options
47457 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47460 are described in the section
47463 \begin_inset space ~
47467 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47469 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47477 \begin_inset space ~
47485 \begin_layout Section
47489 \begin_layout Standard
47490 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47492 Program Code Listings
47497 \begin_inset space ~
47505 \begin_layout Section
47509 \begin_layout Standard
47510 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47518 set to be used and set the
47523 The itemize environment is described in section
47524 \begin_inset space ~
47528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47530 reference "sec:Itemize"
47537 \begin_layout Standard
47538 You can furthermore specify a
47541 \begin_inset space ~
47546 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47547 command of the desired character.
47548 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47555 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47561 \begin_inset space \space{}
47565 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47575 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47576 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47579 \begin_layout Standard
47580 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47588 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47589 -packages in the preamble (menu
47592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47593 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47596 \begin_inset space ~
47602 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47606 usepackage{textcomp}
47609 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47613 usepackage{amssymb}
47623 \begin_layout Section
47627 \begin_layout Standard
47628 Branches are described in section
47629 \begin_inset space ~
47633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47635 reference "sec:Branches"
47642 \begin_layout Section
47644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47646 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47653 \begin_layout Standard
47654 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47657 \begin_layout Description
47659 \begin_inset space ~
47663 \begin_inset space ~
47666 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47686 View Master Document
47687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47694 Update Master Document
47695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47702 menu or the toolbar.
47703 The default is set in
47705 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47706 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47708 \begin_inset space ~
47711 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47715 \begin_inset space ~
47719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47721 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47728 \begin_layout Description
47730 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
47732 \begin_inset space ~
47736 \begin_inset space ~
47740 \begin_inset space ~
47743 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
47748 option which is needed with some packages.
47749 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
47750 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
47753 \begin_layout Description
47755 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47761 \begin_inset space ~
47764 Options offers settings for the
47772 \begin_layout Itemize
47776 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
47778 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
47780 \begin_inset space ~
47786 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
47788 \begin_inset space ~
47792 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
47798 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
47800 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
47801 settings for the menu
47803 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47807 \begin_inset space ~
47811 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
47814 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
47815 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
47820 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
47822 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
47824 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
47827 or a detailed description see section
47829 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47834 \begin_inset space ~
47840 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
47844 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
47848 \begin_layout Itemize
47850 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
47853 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
47855 determines whether so-called
47856 \begin_inset Quotes els
47860 \begin_inset Quotes ers
47864 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
47866 \begin_inset Quotes els
47870 \begin_inset Quotes ers
47873 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
47874 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
47875 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
47877 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
47879 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
47880 macros, you can uncheck this.
47881 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
47888 \begin_layout Description
47890 \begin_inset space ~
47894 \begin_inset space ~
47897 Options offers settings for the export format
47905 \begin_inset space ~
47910 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47911 \begin_inset space ~
47914 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47918 \begin_inset space ~
47923 settings are described in detail in section
47925 Math Output in XHTML
47930 \begin_inset space ~
47939 \begin_inset space ~
47943 \begin_inset space ~
47948 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47951 \begin_layout Description
47953 \begin_inset space ~
47958 Save transient properties
47960 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47961 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47962 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47966 \begin_layout Itemize
47967 the activation of change tracking
47970 \begin_layout Itemize
47971 the output of tracked changes
47974 \begin_layout Itemize
47975 the recording of the document directory path.
47978 \begin_layout Standard
47979 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47980 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47984 \begin_layout Section
47992 \begin_layout Standard
47993 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47995 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47997 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47999 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48003 \begin_layout Standard
48004 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48005 -syntax is given in section
48006 \begin_inset space ~
48010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48012 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48019 \begin_layout Chapter
48025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48027 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48032 \begin_inset Index idx
48035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48044 \begin_layout Standard
48045 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48047 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48051 It has the following submenus.
48054 \begin_layout Section
48058 \begin_layout Subsection
48062 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48063 User Interface File
48064 \begin_inset Index idx
48067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48068 Customization ! of toolbars
48074 \begin_inset Index idx
48077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48078 Customization ! of menus
48086 \begin_layout Standard
48087 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48088 interface (ui) file.
48089 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48097 \begin_layout Description
48102 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48105 \begin_layout Description
48112 the menu entries in popup context menus
48115 \begin_layout Description
48120 specifies the toolbar buttons
48123 \begin_layout Standard
48124 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48125 and edit the entries.
48128 \begin_layout Standard
48129 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48141 entries must be finished with an explicit
48166 and in the case of the
48167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48179 The syntax for the entries is:
48182 \begin_layout Standard
48183 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48212 \begin_layout Standard
48214 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48217 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48218 -functions are listed in the menu
48220 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48222 \begin_inset space ~
48230 \begin_layout Standard
48231 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48237 \begin_layout Standard
48238 For example, assuming you use the menu
48240 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48243 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48247 \begin_layout Standard
48248 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48272 \begin_layout Standard
48274 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48289 to have the sixth bookmark.
48292 \begin_layout Standard
48296 \begin_inset space ~
48301 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48302 's toolbar buttons.
48303 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48304 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48307 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48315 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48319 \begin_layout Standard
48322 Enable tool tips in main work area
48324 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48332 \begin_layout Standard
48337 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48338 should display in the menu
48340 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48342 \begin_inset space ~
48350 \begin_layout Subsection
48354 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48358 \begin_layout Standard
48361 Restore window layouts and geometries
48364 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48365 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48369 \begin_layout Standard
48372 Restore cursor positions
48374 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48378 \begin_layout Standard
48381 Load opened files from last session
48383 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48387 \begin_layout Standard
48390 Clear all session information
48392 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48393 sessions (cursor positions, names
48394 of last opened documents, etc.).
48397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48401 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48406 \begin_inset Index idx
48409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48418 \begin_layout Standard
48421 Backup original documents when saving
48423 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48424 it was saved the last time.
48425 It is stored in the
48428 \begin_inset space ~
48434 \begin_inset space ~
48438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48440 reference "sec:Paths"
48444 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48447 \begin_inset space ~
48453 The backup file has the file extension
48454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48468 \begin_layout Standard
48471 Backup documents, every
48473 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48476 \begin_layout Standard
48479 Save documents compressed by default
48481 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48482 \begin_inset space ~
48486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48488 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48493 This applies to newly created documents only.
48494 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48497 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48498 Windows & work area
48501 \begin_layout Standard
48504 Open documents in tabs
48506 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48510 \begin_layout Standard
48515 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48522 \begin_inset space ~
48526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48528 reference "sec:Paths"
48532 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48539 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48540 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48541 of \SpecialChar LyX
48543 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48544 instance is created for each file.
48547 \begin_layout Standard
48550 Single close-tab button
48552 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48562 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48563 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48564 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48568 \begin_layout Standard
48569 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48577 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48578 before the change takes effect.
48586 \begin_layout Standard
48591 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48593 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48595 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48599 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48600 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48601 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48604 \begin_layout Subsection
48606 \begin_inset Index idx
48609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48618 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48625 \begin_layout Standard
48626 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48630 \begin_layout Standard
48631 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48639 This section only deals with the fonts
48643 the \SpecialChar LyX
48645 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48648 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48649 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48660 \begin_layout Standard
48661 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48678 (depends on the system) as its
48681 \begin_inset space ~
48697 \begin_layout Standard
48698 You can change the font size with the
48705 \begin_layout Standard
48710 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48715 points have the size of 1
48716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48720 \begin_inset space ~
48724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48726 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48731 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48736 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48737 \begin_inset space ~
48741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48743 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48750 \begin_layout Subsection
48752 \begin_inset Index idx
48755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48756 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48763 \begin_inset Index idx
48766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48775 \begin_layout Standard
48776 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48777 by choosing an item in the
48778 list and selecting the
48785 \begin_layout Standard
48786 By checking the option
48790 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48793 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48794 \begin_inset space ~
48798 \begin_inset space ~
48803 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48806 \begin_layout Subsection
48808 \begin_inset Index idx
48811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48820 \begin_layout Standard
48821 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48825 \begin_layout Standard
48830 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48831 This feature is described in section
48832 \begin_inset space ~
48836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48838 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48845 \begin_layout Standard
48846 Checking the option
48849 \begin_inset space ~
48853 \begin_inset space ~
48857 \begin_inset space ~
48862 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48865 \begin_layout Section
48867 \begin_inset Index idx
48870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48879 \begin_layout Subsection
48883 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48887 \begin_layout Standard
48890 Cursor follows scrollbar
48892 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48896 \begin_layout Standard
48897 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48898 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48899 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48902 \begin_layout Standard
48905 Scroll below end of document
48907 is self-explanatory.
48910 \begin_layout Standard
48911 In \SpecialChar LyX
48912 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48919 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48921 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48922 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48925 \begin_layout Standard
48928 Sort environments alphabetically
48930 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48933 \begin_layout Standard
48936 Group environments by their category
48938 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48941 \begin_layout Standard
48946 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48957 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48961 \begin_layout Standard
48962 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48967 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48968 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48972 \begin_layout Subsection
48974 \begin_inset Index idx
48977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48984 \begin_inset Index idx
48987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48988 Settings ! Shortcuts
48996 \begin_layout Standard
49001 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49003 Several binding files are available, among them:
49006 \begin_layout Description
49007 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49010 \begin_layout Description
49011 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49023 \begin_layout Description
49024 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49035 \begin_layout Standard
49036 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49041 , and binding files for special languages.
49042 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49047 \begin_inset space \space{}
49051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49059 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49060 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49061 will try to use the appropriate binding
49065 \begin_layout Standard
49066 Some binding files, like
49070 , only have a limited scope.
49071 When looking at the end of the file
49075 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49078 \begin_layout Standard
49082 \begin_inset space ~
49086 \begin_inset space ~
49091 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49092 in the selected key binding file.
49095 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49099 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49104 \begin_inset Index idx
49107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49108 Key Bindings ! Editing
49116 \begin_layout Standard
49117 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49118 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49119 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49120 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49123 Show key-bindings containing
49126 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49127 Insert there for example as keyword
49128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49135 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49136 functions that contain
49137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49145 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49146 All \SpecialChar LyX
49147 functions are also listed in the file
49152 that you will find in the
49159 \begin_layout Standard
49160 For example, to add the shortcut
49168 , select the function and press the
49173 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49174 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49177 \begin_layout Standard
49178 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49179 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49181 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49182 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49184 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49189 \begin_layout Standard
49190 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49193 \begin_layout Standard
49194 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49196 The syntax of the entries is:
49199 \begin_layout Standard
49205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49224 \begin_layout Standard
49225 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49226 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49254 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49255 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49256 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49257 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49259 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49263 , you needed to specify it as
49268 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49271 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49274 \begin_layout Subsection
49276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49278 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49283 \begin_inset Index idx
49286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49293 \begin_inset Index idx
49296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49297 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49305 \begin_layout Standard
49306 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49307 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49308 provides keyboard maps.
49309 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49310 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49313 \begin_inset space ~
49317 \begin_inset space ~
49322 and select the keyboard map file named
49329 \begin_layout Standard
49338 keyboard map and, if you use the
49342 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49345 arg "keymap-primary"
49351 arg "keymap-secondary"
49354 respectively or toggle between them with
49357 arg "keymap-toggle"
49363 \begin_layout Standard
49364 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49372 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49381 \begin_layout Standard
49382 You can also specify the mouse
49384 Wheel scrolling speed
49387 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49391 Middle mouse button pasting
49393 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49394 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49397 \begin_layout Standard
49405 \begin_inset space ~
49409 \begin_inset space ~
49414 you can select a key for zooming.
49415 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49418 \begin_layout Subsection
49422 \begin_layout Standard
49423 Input completion is described in section
49424 \begin_inset space ~
49428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49430 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49437 \begin_layout Section
49439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49446 \begin_inset Index idx
49449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49456 \begin_inset Index idx
49459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49468 \begin_layout Standard
49469 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49470 are normally determined during
49472 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49475 \begin_layout Description
49477 \begin_inset space ~
49480 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49481 's working directory.
49482 It is the default when you
49493 \begin_inset space ~
49501 \begin_layout Description
49503 \begin_inset space ~
49506 templates This directory
49507 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49508 contains the templates that are shown
49509 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49510 will be opened when you use the menu
49511 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49516 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49518 \begin_inset space ~
49522 \begin_inset space ~
49530 \begin_layout Description
49532 \begin_inset space ~
49535 files This directory
49536 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49537 will be opened when you use the
49538 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49539 contains the example files that are listed in
49542 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49551 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49553 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49555 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49561 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49563 \begin_inset Newline newline
49567 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49579 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49580 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49590 \begin_layout Description
49592 \begin_inset space ~
49596 \begin_inset Index idx
49599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49605 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49606 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49607 \begin_inset space ~
49611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49613 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49621 will be used to save the backups.
49622 \begin_inset Newline newline
49625 Backup files have the ending
49626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49636 \begin_layout Description
49638 \begin_inset space ~
49641 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49642 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49644 \begin_inset Newline newline
49651 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49657 You can edit this file with the program
49666 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49667 in its preferences under
49670 \begin_inset space ~
49676 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49681 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49683 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49684 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49690 and \SpecialChar LyX
49691 need to be running the same time.
49692 \begin_inset Newline newline
49695 The pipe is also used for the
49699 feature, see section
49700 \begin_inset space ~
49704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49706 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49711 \begin_inset Newline newline
49714 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49715 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49716 \begin_inset Newline newline
49732 \begin_layout Description
49734 \begin_inset space ~
49737 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49740 \begin_layout Description
49742 \begin_inset space ~
49745 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49746 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49747 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49750 \begin_layout Description
49752 \begin_inset space ~
49755 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49761 You only need to specify it if you are using
49765 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49767 For \SpecialChar LyX
49772 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49776 \begin_layout Description
49778 \begin_inset space ~
49781 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49782 When \SpecialChar LyX
49783 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49784 to find it on the system.
49785 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49787 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49796 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49797 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49800 \begin_layout Description
49802 \begin_inset space ~
49805 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49806 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49807 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49808 code or in the document
49810 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49812 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49813 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49814 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49815 scanned for the input files.
49816 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49817 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49819 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49820 compilation may fail for some documents.
49823 \begin_layout Section
49827 \begin_layout Standard
49828 Here you can insert your
49837 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49839 \begin_inset space ~
49843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49845 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49849 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49852 \begin_layout Section
49854 \begin_inset Index idx
49857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49858 Language ! Settings
49864 \begin_inset Index idx
49867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49868 Settings ! Language
49876 \begin_layout Subsection
49878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49880 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49887 \begin_layout Description
49889 \begin_inset space ~
49893 \begin_inset space ~
49896 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49898 You can find its actual translation status here:
49899 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49901 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49907 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
49911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49913 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
49914 LaTeX Language Support
49919 \begin_layout Description
49921 \begin_inset space ~
49924 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49925 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49926 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49927 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49944 The most widespread language package is
49949 \begin_inset Index idx
49952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49959 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
49961 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49962 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49963 come with the alternative
49969 \begin_inset Index idx
49972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49974 packages ! polyglossia
49979 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
49980 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
49986 The available selections are described in section
49987 \begin_inset space ~
49991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49993 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50000 \begin_layout Description
50002 \begin_inset space ~
50006 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50007 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50008 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50010 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50014 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50018 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50020 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50024 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50025 that is used to switch to a different language
50026 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50027 to start the package
50031 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50032 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50036 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50037 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50040 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50044 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50052 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50060 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50063 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50065 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50069 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50087 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50088 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50095 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
50096 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50101 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50106 , this setting is ignored.
50111 \begin_layout Description
50113 \begin_inset space ~
50117 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
50124 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
50125 Use this if the language switch set in
50129 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50133 's alternative command
50137 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
50138 \SpecialChar allowbreak
50141 end{otherlanguage*}
50145 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
50146 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50147 command toggles the package on and off
50148 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
50149 Empty by default, as
50153 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50155 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
50160 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50166 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50171 , this setting is ignored.
50176 \begin_layout Description
50178 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50180 \begin_inset space ~
50184 \begin_inset space ~
50187 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50191 \begin_layout Description
50193 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50195 \begin_inset space ~
50199 \begin_inset space ~
50202 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50208 \begin_layout Description
50210 \begin_inset space ~
50214 \begin_inset space ~
50218 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50220 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50223 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50224 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50227 to the document class options
50228 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50229 rather than the language package options.
50230 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50234 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50235 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50237 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50238 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50240 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50245 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50246 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50255 \begin_layout Description
50257 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50259 \begin_inset space ~
50263 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50265 \begin_inset space ~
50269 \begin_inset space ~
50273 \begin_inset space ~
50279 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
50281 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
50284 this option is set,
50285 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
50286 the language switch defined in
50289 \begin_inset space ~
50294 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
50295 to the document language.
50296 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
50297 This might be needed if you use a non-default
50300 \begin_inset space ~
50305 or if a package resets the document language.
50306 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
50307 usually should be the document language).
50308 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
50309 documents start with the chosen document language.
50310 When this option is not set, the
50313 \begin_inset space ~
50318 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50320 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50323 \begin_inset space ~
50333 \begin_layout Description
50335 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
50337 \begin_inset space ~
50341 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
50343 \begin_inset space ~
50347 \begin_inset space ~
50351 \begin_inset space ~
50357 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
50361 \begin_inset space ~
50365 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
50366 Set document language explicitly
50372 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
50374 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
50380 \begin_inset space ~
50386 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
50388 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
50392 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
50394 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
50397 the end of the document.
50398 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
50402 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50403 \paragraph_spacing single
50405 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
50411 \begin_layout Description
50413 \begin_inset space ~
50417 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
50419 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
50423 \begin_inset space ~
50427 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
50429 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
50431 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
50435 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
50438 in a language different
50439 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
50441 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
50444 the document language will be
50445 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
50446 marked (by default with a blue
50449 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
50451 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
50455 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
50459 \begin_layout Description
50461 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
50463 \begin_inset space ~
50467 \begin_inset space ~
50471 \begin_inset space ~
50474 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
50475 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
50476 switched via the operating system.
50477 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
50479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50482 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
50483 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
50488 \begin_layout Description
50490 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
50492 \begin_inset space ~
50496 \begin_inset space ~
50499 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50500 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50505 \begin_layout Description
50507 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50509 \begin_inset space ~
50513 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
50515 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50519 \begin_inset space ~
50523 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
50524 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
50525 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
50527 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
50531 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
50533 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
50534 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
50536 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50537 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
50538 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50540 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
50545 \begin_layout Standard
50550 means that the cursor
50551 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
50552 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
50553 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
50555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50558 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
50559 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
50563 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
50565 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
50566 specific case always means: move
50570 in text (even if this means:
50576 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50577 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
50578 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
50579 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
50580 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
50581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50592 \begin_layout Standard
50594 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
50599 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
50600 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
50601 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
50605 ) when coming from the left.
50606 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
50608 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50609 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
50610 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
50615 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50617 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
50621 \begin_layout Description
50623 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
50625 \begin_inset space ~
50629 \begin_inset space ~
50632 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
50633 separator alignment).
50634 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
50636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50639 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
50640 (static) custom character here.
50643 \begin_layout Description
50645 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
50647 \begin_inset space ~
50651 \begin_inset space ~
50654 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50660 \begin_layout Subsection
50664 \begin_layout Standard
50665 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
50666 \begin_inset space ~
50670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50672 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50679 \begin_layout Section
50683 \begin_layout Subsection
50685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50687 name "subsec:General-output"
50694 \begin_layout Description
50696 \begin_inset space ~
50699 search Commands that will be used for the menu
50701 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50703 \begin_inset space ~
50709 For a detailed description see section
50711 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50716 \begin_inset space ~
50724 \begin_layout Description
50726 \begin_inset space ~
50729 Options Options for the program
50733 that is used for the export format
50738 \begin_inset space ~
50742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50744 reference "subsec:Export"
50749 Possible options are listed in the
50754 \begin_inset Newline newline
50758 \begin_inset Flex URL
50761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50763 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50773 \begin_layout Description
50775 \begin_inset space ~
50779 \begin_inset space ~
50782 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50785 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50786 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50788 \begin_inset space ~
50794 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50797 \begin_layout Description
50799 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
50801 \begin_inset space ~
50805 \begin_inset Index idx
50808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50815 \begin_inset Index idx
50818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50819 Settings ! Date format
50824 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
50825 \begin_inset Newline newline
50829 \begin_inset Flex URL
50832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50834 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
50840 \begin_inset Newline newline
50843 For example the format
50844 \begin_inset Newline newline
50848 \begin_inset Newline newline
50851 prints the date as day/month/year.
50856 \begin_layout Description
50858 \begin_inset space ~
50862 \begin_inset space ~
50865 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
50866 is allowed to overwrite on export.
50869 \begin_layout Subsection
50875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50877 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
50882 \begin_inset Index idx
50885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50886 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
50895 \begin_layout Description
50897 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
50899 \begin_inset space ~
50907 \begin_inset space ~
50911 \begin_inset space ~
50914 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
50919 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
50940 are used for Cyrillic.
50941 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
50942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50954 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
50956 sets up in the background.
50957 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
50962 \begin_layout Description
50964 \begin_inset space ~
50968 \begin_inset space ~
50972 \begin_inset space ~
50976 \begin_inset space ~
50979 options They only have an effect when the program
50983 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
50986 \begin_layout Standard
50987 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
50988 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
50989 manuals of the applications.
50992 \begin_layout Description
50994 \begin_inset space ~
50997 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
50998 \begin_inset space ~
51002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51004 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51011 \begin_layout Description
51013 \begin_inset space ~
51016 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51017 \begin_inset space ~
51021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51023 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51030 \begin_layout Description
51032 \begin_inset space ~
51035 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51036 \begin_inset space ~
51040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51042 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51049 \begin_layout Description
51055 \begin_inset space ~
51058 command Command for the program
51060 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51063 that is described in the section
51065 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51070 Additional Features
51075 \begin_layout Standard
51076 There are additionally the following options:
51079 \begin_layout Description
51081 \begin_inset space ~
51085 \begin_inset space ~
51089 \begin_inset space ~
51093 \begin_inset space ~
51098 \begin_inset space ~
51101 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
51102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51119 to separate folders.
51120 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
51122 \begin_inset Index idx
51125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51132 \begin_inset Index idx
51135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51144 \begin_layout Description
51146 \begin_inset space ~
51150 \begin_inset space ~
51154 \begin_inset space ~
51158 \begin_inset space ~
51162 \begin_inset space ~
51166 \begin_inset space ~
51169 changes Removes all manually set
51175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51176 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51178 \begin_inset space ~
51183 dialog when changing the document class.
51186 \begin_layout Section
51188 \begin_inset space ~
51192 \begin_inset Index idx
51195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51204 \begin_layout Subsection
51206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51208 name "subsec:Converters"
51213 \begin_inset Index idx
51216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51225 \begin_layout Standard
51226 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51227 from one format to another.
51228 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51229 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51236 \begin_inset space ~
51241 field and press the
51246 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51250 \begin_inset space ~
51255 drop-down list, modify the
51259 field and press the
51266 \begin_layout Standard
51269 Converter File Cache
51275 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
51277 Maximum Age (in days
51280 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
51281 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
51284 \begin_layout Standard
51285 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
51286 definition, is described in the section
51297 \begin_layout Subsection
51299 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51301 name "sec:File-Formats"
51306 \begin_inset Index idx
51309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51316 \begin_inset Index idx
51319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51328 \begin_layout Standard
51329 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
51339 programs that should be used for certain formats.
51342 \begin_layout Standard
51343 You can also define the
51345 Default output format
51347 that is used when you use
51349 View, Update, View Master Document
51353 Update Master Document
51359 menu or the toolbar.
51362 \begin_layout Standard
51363 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51374 \begin_layout Standard
51375 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51377 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51378 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51379 This is done by specifying a
51384 More about this is described in the section
51395 \begin_layout Chapter
51396 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51398 \begin_inset Index idx
51401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51410 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51417 \begin_layout Standard
51419 \begin_inset space ~
51423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51425 reference "tab:Units"
51429 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51430 and used in this documentation.
51433 \begin_layout Standard
51434 \begin_inset Float table
51441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51442 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51460 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51468 \begin_inset Tabular
51469 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51470 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51471 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51472 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51473 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51560 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51626 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
51630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51828 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51897 scaled point (65536
51898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51965 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
51970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52089 % of original image width
52094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52178 \begin_layout Standard
52179 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52182 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52189 \begin_layout Bibliography
52190 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52191 LatexCommand bibitem
52198 The \SpecialChar LyX
52200 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52203 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52209 \begin_inset Newline newline
52213 \begin_inset Flex URL
52216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52218 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52226 \begin_layout Bibliography
52227 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52228 LatexCommand bibitem
52229 key "latexcompanion"
52234 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52236 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52237 Companion Second Edition.
52240 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52243 \begin_layout Bibliography
52244 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52245 LatexCommand bibitem
52251 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52254 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52258 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52261 \begin_layout Bibliography
52262 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52263 LatexCommand bibitem
52272 : A Document Preparation System.
52275 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
52278 \begin_layout Bibliography
52279 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52280 LatexCommand bibitem
52290 The \SpecialChar TeX
52294 Addison-Wesley, 1984
52297 \begin_layout Bibliography
52298 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52299 LatexCommand bibitem
52305 The \SpecialChar TeX
52307 \begin_inset Newline newline
52311 \begin_inset Flex URL
52314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52316 https://ctan.org/topic
52324 \begin_layout Bibliography
52325 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52326 LatexCommand bibitem
52332 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52334 \begin_inset Newline newline
52338 \begin_inset Flex URL
52341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52343 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
52351 \begin_layout Bibliography
52352 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52353 LatexCommand bibitem
52360 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52362 name "Documentation"
52363 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52370 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52374 \begin_inset Newline newline
52378 \begin_inset Flex URL
52381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52383 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52391 \begin_layout Bibliography
52392 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52393 LatexCommand bibitem
52400 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52402 name "Documentation"
52403 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52408 how to use the program
52410 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52414 \begin_inset Newline newline
52418 \begin_inset Flex URL
52421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52423 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52431 \begin_layout Bibliography
52432 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52433 LatexCommand bibitem
52440 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52442 name "Documentation"
52443 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52448 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52454 \begin_inset Index idx
52457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52459 packages ! biblatex
52465 \begin_inset Newline newline
52469 \begin_inset Flex URL
52472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52474 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52482 \begin_layout Bibliography
52483 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52484 LatexCommand bibitem
52491 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52493 name "Documentation"
52494 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52499 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52505 \begin_inset Index idx
52508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52516 \begin_inset Newline newline
52520 \begin_inset Flex URL
52523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52525 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52533 \begin_layout Bibliography
52534 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52535 LatexCommand bibitem
52542 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52544 name "Documentation"
52545 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
52555 \begin_inset Newline newline
52559 \begin_inset Flex URL
52562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52564 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
52572 \begin_layout Bibliography
52573 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52574 LatexCommand bibitem
52575 key "makeindex-man"
52581 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52584 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
52594 \begin_inset Newline newline
52598 \begin_inset Flex URL
52601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52603 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
52611 \begin_layout Bibliography
52612 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52613 LatexCommand bibitem
52620 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52622 name "Documentation"
52623 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
52633 \begin_inset Newline newline
52637 \begin_inset Flex URL
52640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52642 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
52650 \begin_layout Bibliography
52651 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52652 LatexCommand bibitem
52659 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52661 name "Documentation"
52662 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
52667 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
52669 \begin_inset Newline newline
52673 \begin_inset Flex URL
52676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52678 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
52686 \begin_layout Bibliography
52687 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52688 LatexCommand bibitem
52695 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52697 name "Documentation"
52698 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
52703 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52709 \begin_inset Index idx
52712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52720 \begin_inset Newline newline
52724 \begin_inset Flex URL
52727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52729 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52737 \begin_layout Bibliography
52738 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52739 LatexCommand bibitem
52746 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52748 name "Documentation"
52749 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52754 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52760 \begin_inset Index idx
52763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52765 packages ! enumitem
52771 \begin_inset Newline newline
52775 \begin_inset Flex URL
52778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52780 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52788 \begin_layout Bibliography
52789 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52790 LatexCommand bibitem
52797 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52799 name "Documentation"
52800 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52805 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52811 \begin_inset Index idx
52814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52816 packages ! fancyhdr
52822 \begin_inset Newline newline
52826 \begin_inset Flex URL
52829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52831 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
52839 \begin_layout Bibliography
52840 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52841 LatexCommand bibitem
52848 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52850 name "Documentation"
52851 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
52856 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52862 \begin_inset Index idx
52865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52867 packages ! hyperref
52873 \begin_inset Newline newline
52877 \begin_inset Flex URL
52880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52882 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
52890 \begin_layout Bibliography
52891 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52892 LatexCommand bibitem
52899 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52901 name "Documentation"
52902 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
52907 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52913 \begin_inset Index idx
52916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52918 packages ! microtype
52924 \begin_inset Newline newline
52928 \begin_inset Flex URL
52931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52933 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
52941 \begin_layout Bibliography
52942 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52943 LatexCommand bibitem
52950 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52952 name "Documentation"
52953 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
52958 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52964 \begin_inset Index idx
52967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52975 \begin_inset Newline newline
52979 \begin_inset Flex URL
52982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52984 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
52992 \begin_layout Bibliography
52993 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52994 LatexCommand bibitem
53001 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53003 name "Documentation"
53004 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53009 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53015 \begin_inset Index idx
53018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53020 packages ! prettyref
53026 \begin_inset Newline newline
53030 \begin_inset Flex URL
53033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53035 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53043 \begin_layout Bibliography
53044 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53045 LatexCommand bibitem
53052 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53054 name "Documentation"
53055 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53060 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53066 \begin_inset Index idx
53069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53071 packages ! refstyle
53077 \begin_inset Newline newline
53081 \begin_inset Flex URL
53084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53086 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
53094 \begin_layout Bibliography
53095 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53096 LatexCommand bibitem
53103 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53106 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
53111 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53113 \begin_inset Newline newline
53117 \begin_inset Flex URL
53120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53122 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53130 \begin_layout Bibliography
53131 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53132 LatexCommand bibitem
53139 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53142 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
53147 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53149 \begin_inset Newline newline
53153 \begin_inset Flex URL
53156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53158 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
53166 \begin_layout Bibliography
53167 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53168 LatexCommand bibitem
53175 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53178 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53183 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53184 for Cyrillic languages:
53185 \begin_inset Newline newline
53189 \begin_inset Flex URL
53192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53194 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53202 \begin_layout Bibliography
53203 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53204 LatexCommand bibitem
53211 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53214 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53219 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53221 \begin_inset Newline newline
53225 \begin_inset Flex URL
53228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53230 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53238 \begin_layout Bibliography
53239 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53240 LatexCommand bibitem
53247 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53250 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53255 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53257 \begin_inset Newline newline
53261 \begin_inset Flex URL
53264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53266 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
53274 \begin_layout Bibliography
53275 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53276 LatexCommand bibitem
53283 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53286 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
53291 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53293 \begin_inset Newline newline
53297 \begin_inset Flex URL
53300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53302 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
53310 \begin_layout Standard
53311 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53345 \begin_inset Note Note
53348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53355 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
53356 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
53357 bibliography is the second one:
53365 \begin_layout Standard
53366 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53367 LatexCommand bibtex
53368 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
53369 options "biblio/alphadin"
53376 \begin_layout Standard
53377 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53381 \begin_layout Standard
53385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53391 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53400 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53408 \begin_inset Note Note
53411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53412 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53413 \begin_inset space ~
53417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53419 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53431 \begin_layout Standard
53432 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53433 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53439 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53440 LatexCommand printindex